ECO332

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 230

,

NATIONAL OPEN UNIVERSITY OF NIGERIA

MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS
ECO 332

FACULTY OF SOCIAL SCIENCES

COURSE GUIDE

Course Developer:
Dr. Onyemaechi Onwe
Department of Economics
National Open University of Nigeria

Course Reviewer
Dr. Adewale Adegoriola
Department of Economics
Federal University Lafia, Lafia
© 2023 by NOUN Press
National Open University of Nigeria,
Headquarters,
University Village,
Plot 91, Cadastral Zone,
Nnamdi Azikiwe Expressway,
Jabi, Abuja.

Lagos Office
14/16 Ahmadu Bello Way,
Victoria Island, Lagos.

e-mail: [email protected]
URL: www.nou.edu.ng

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced, in any form or by any means, without
permission in writing from the publisher. Printed: 2022
ISBN:

Printed:

ISBN:

Course Guide
Introduction
Course Competences

Course Objectives

Working through this Course

Study Units

References and Further Readings

Presentation Schedule

Assessment

How to Get the Most from This Course

Online Facilitations

Course Information

Course Code: ECO 332


Course Title: Managerial Economics
Course Unit: 2
Course Status: Compulsory
Course Club:
Semester: Second Semester
Course Duration: Fifteen Lecture Weeks
Required Hours for Study: Two Hours for each unit

Course Team
Course Developer: NOUN
Course Writer:
Content Editor:
Instructional Designer:
Learning Technologists:
Copy Editor

INTRODUCTION
Welcome to Managerial Economics (ECO 332).

Managerial Economics as a course required for effective resource management was put in place due
to the following developments in the global business environment:
(a) Growing complexity of business decision-making processes.
(b) Increasing need for the use of economic logic, concept, theories, and tools of economic
analysis in the process of decision-making.
(c) Rapid increases in the demand for professionally trainedmanagerial manpower.
These developments have made it necessary that every manager aspiring for good leadership and
achievement of organizational objectives be equipped with relevant economic principles and
applications. Unfortunately, a gap has been observed in this respect among today’s managers. It is
therefore the aim of this course to bridge such gap.

Course Competences
The key of Managerial Economics is the micro-economic theory of the firm. It lessens the gap
between economics in theory and economics in practice. Managerial Economics is a science dealing
with effective use of scarce resources. It guides the managers in taking decisions relating to the firm’s
customers, competitors, suppliers as well as relating to the internal functioning of a firm. It makes use
of statistical and analytical tools to assess economic theories in solving practical business problems.

Course Objectives
On completion of the requirements of this course, students and managers alike will be expected to:
• Understand the relative importance of Managerial Economics;
• Know how the application of the principles of managerial economics can aid in the
achievement of business objectives;
• Understand the modern managerial decision rules and optimization techniques;
• Be equipped with tools necessary in the analysis of consumer behaviours, as well as in
forecasting product demand;
• Be equipped with the tools for analyzing production and costs;
• Understand and be able to apply latest pricing strategies;
Working through the Course
To complete this course, you are required to read the study units, referenced books and other materials
on the course. Each unit contains self-assessment exercises called Student Assessment Exercises
(SAE). At some points in the course, you will be required to submit assignments for assessment
purposes and at the end of the course, there is a final examination. This course should take about 15
weeks to complete and some components of the course are outlined under the course material
subsection.

Course Structure
This course is presented in 5 modules consisting of 20 units in all. Each is designed to achieve
specific objectives.

Module 1: Basic Principles in the Application of Managerial Economics


Unit 1: Definition and Importance of Managerial Economics
Unit 2: Theories of Profit
Unit 3: Profit Maximisation as a Business Objective
Unit 4: Other Business Objectives
Unit 5: Constrained Optimisation

Module 2: Decision Analysis


Unit 1: Decision Analysis
Unit 2: Expected Monetary Value Decisions, Decision- Making Involving Sample
Information, and Time Perspective in Business Decisions

Module 3: Analysis of Market Demand, Demand Functions and Demand Forecasting


Unit 1: Analysis of Market Demand
Unit 2: Demand Functions
Unit 3: Elasticity of Demand
Unit 4: Price Elasticity, Revenues and Income Elasticity of Demand
Unit 5: Demand Forecasting
Module 4: Production and Cost Analysis
Unit 1: Theory of Production
Unit 2: Degrees of Production Function and Returns to Scale, Economies of Scale, and
Optimal Input Combinations
Unit 3: Theory of Cost
Unit 4: Cost-Output Relations
Unit 5: Long-Run Cost-Output Relations and Break-Even Analysis

Module 5: Market Structure and Pricing Decisions


Unit 1: Perfect Competition
Unit 2: Monopoly
Unit 3: Monopolistic Competition

Each study unit will take at least one hour for online facilitation, and it includes the introduction,
objectives, main content, self-assessment exercise, conclusion, summary and references. Other areas
border on the Tutor-Marked Assessment (TMA) questions. Some of the self-assessment exercises will
necessitate discussion, brainstorming and argument with some of your colleagues. You are advised to
do so to understand and get acquainted with economic events.
There are also textbooks under the reference and other resources including online resources for further
reading. They are meant to give you additional information, hence you need to source for them. You
are required to study the materials; practice the self-assessment exercise and tutor-marked assignment
(TMA) questions for a greater and in-depth understanding of the course. By doing so, the stated
learning objectives of the course would have been achieved.

References and Further Readings


For further reading and more detailed information about the course, the following materials are
recommended:
Allen, R. G. D. (1956). Mathematical Analysis for Economists, Macmillan, London.
Baumol, W. J. (1977). Economic Theory and Operations Analysis, Englewood Cliffe, N. J. 4th Edn.
Bilas, R. A. (1971). Microeconomic Theory, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Boulding. K. E. (1966). Economics Analysis: Microeconomics, 4th Edition, New York Harper and
Row.
Browning, E. K. & Browning, J. M. (1989). Microeconomic Theory and Application, Scott, Foresman
& Co., London, 3th Edition.
Chiang, A. C. (1984). Fundamental Methods Mathematical Economists, 3rd Edition McGraw-Hill,
NewYork.
Davis, R. & Chang, S. (1986). Principles of Managerial Economics, Prentice Hall, N.J.
Douglas, E. J. (1983). Managerial Economics: Theory and Practice and problems, Prentice-Hall Inc.,
New Jersey. 2nd edition.
Dwivedi, D. N. (2002). Managerial Economics, sixth edition. (New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House
Ltd).
Ferguson, C. E. (1972). Microeconomic Theory, 3rd Edition, Illnois, Richard D. Irwin, Inc.
Haessuler, E. F. & Paul, R. S. (1976). Introductory Mathematical Analysis for Students of Business
and Economics, 2nd edition (Reston Virginia: Reston Publishing Company).
Haynes, W. W. (1969). Managerial Economics: Analysis and Cases, Business Publications, Inc.,
Texas
Hirshleifer, J. (1987). Price Theory and Application, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.
Koutsoyiannis, A. (1979). Modern Microeconomics, 2nd ed., Macmillian.
Lerner, A. P. Microeconomic Theory in Perspective in Economics-Economists look at their Field of
Study by A. A. Brown, E. Neuberger and M. Pakmaster (eds), Mc Graw-Hill, NY.
Mansfield E. (ed.). (1996). Managerial Economics-Theory, Application and Cases, 3rd Edition, W.
W. Norton and Co., Inc., New York.
Marshall, A. (1920). Principles of Economics. 8th Edition, London, Macmillian & Co.
Nicholson, W. (1975). Intermediate Microeconomics and Its Application, Dryden Press, Hindale.
Reddy, M. J., (1981). Demand Forecasting, Light and Life Publication, New Delhi.
Salvatore, D. (1989). Managerial Economics, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Samuelson, W., & Marks, S. (2003). Managerial Economics, 4th edition, Wiley.
Spencer, M. H. & Siegelman, L. (1976). Managerial Economics, Houghton Mifflin, Boston.
Walker, F. A. (1887). The Source of Business Profits, Qly JL of Eco., April.
Webb, S. C. (1976).Managerial Economics, Houghton Mifflin, Boston.
Williamson, O. E. (1963). Managerial Discretion and Business Behaviour. Am Eco. Rev.
Wolfe, H. D. (1966). Business Forecasting Methods, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, Inc.

Module 1: Basic Principles in The Application of


Managerial Economics

This module introduces you to the basic principles in the application of Managerial Economics. The
module consists of 5 units which include: definition and importance of managerial economics;
theories of profit; profit maximisation as a business objective; other business objectives and
constrained optimization.

Unit 1: Definition and Importance of Managerial Economics


Unit 2: Theories of Profit
Unit 3: Profit Maximisation as a Business Objective
Unit 4: Other Business Objectives
Unit 5: Constrained Optimisation

UNIT 1: DEFINITION AND IMPORTANCE OF MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS


Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Definition of Managerial Economics
3.1 Importance of Managerial Economics
3.2 Scope of Managerial Economics
3.3 Managerial Economics and Gap between Theory and Practice
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings
1.0 Introduction
The discovery of managerial economics as a separate course in management studies has been
attributed to three major factors:
a. The growing complexity of business decision-making processes, because of changing market
conditions and the globalization of business transactions.
b. The increasing use of economic logic, concepts, theories, and tools of economic analysis in
business decision-makingprocesses.
c. Rapid increase in demand for professionally trained managerial manpower.

It should be noted that the recent complexities associated with business decisions has increased the
need for application of economic concepts, theories and tools of economic analysis in business
decisions. The reason has been that making appropriate business decision requires clear understanding
of existing market conditions market fundamentals and the business environment in general.
Business decision-making processes therefore, requires intensive and extensive analysis of the
market conditions in the product, input and financial markets. Economic theories, logic and tools
of analysis have been developed for the analysis and prediction of market behaviours. The
application of economic concepts, theories, logic, and analytical tools in the assessment and
prediction of market conditions and business environment has proved to be a significant help to
business decision makers all over the globe.

2.0 Learning Outcomes


At the end of this unit, you will be expected to:
i. Have an understanding of the meaning and importance ofmanagerial economics
ii. Understand the relevant phases in business decision makingprocesses
iii. Be familiar with the scope of Managerial Economics
iv. Be able to discuss freely how managerial economics can fill the gap between theory and
practice
3.0 Definition of Managerial Economics
Managerial Economics is the study of economic theories, logic and tools of economic analysis that are
used by mangers in the process of business decision making. Economic theories and techniques of
economic analysis are applied to analyze business problems, evaluate business options and
opportunities with a view to arriving at an appropriate business decision.

On the other hand, managerial economics is the application of the economic concepts and economic
analysis to the problems of formulating rational managerial decisions. It is drawn heavily from
quantitative techniques such as regression analysis, correlation and calculus. One standard definition
for economics is the study of the production, distribution, and consumption of goods and services. A
second definition is the study of choice related to the allocation of scarce resources. The first
definition indicates that economics includes any business, non-profit organization, or administrative
unit. The second definition establishes that economics is at the core of what managers of these
organizations do.

Managerial economics has been generally defined as the study of economic theories, logic and tools
of economic analysis, used in the process of business decision making. It involves the understanding
and use of economic theories and techniques of economic analysis in analyzing and solving business
problems.

Economic principles contribute significantly towards the performance of managerial duties as well as
responsibilities. Managers with some working knowledge of economics can perform their functions
more effectively and efficiently than those without such knowledge. Taking appropriate business
decisions requires a good understanding of the technical and environmental conditions under which
businessdecisions are taken. Application of economic theories and logic to explain and analyse these
technical conditions and business environment can contribute significantly to the rational
decision- making process.

3.1 Importance of Managerial Economics


In a nutshell, three major contributions of economic theory to business economics have been
enumerated
i. Building of analytical models that help to recognize the structure of managerial problems,
eliminate the minor details that can obstruct decision making, and help to concentrate on the main
problem area.
ii. Making available a set of analytical methods for business analyses thereby, enhancing the
analytical capabilities of the business analyst.
iii. Clarification of the various concepts used in business analysis, enabling the managers avoid
conceptual pitfalls.

3.1.1 Business Decisions and Economic Analysis


Business decision-making basically involves the selection of best out of alternative opportunities open
to the business organization. Decisionmaking processes involve four main phases:
i. Determining and defining the objective to be achieved.
ii. Collection and analysis of information on economic, social, political, and technological
environment.
iii. Inventing, developing and analyzing possible course of action
iv. Selecting a particular course of action from available alternatives.

Note that phases two and three are the most crucial in business decision- making. They put the
manager’s analytical ability to test and help in determining the appropriateness and validity of
decisions in the modern business environment. Personal intelligence, experience, intuition and
business acumen of the manager need to be supplemented with quantitative analysis of business data
on market conditions and business environment. It is in fact, in this area of decision-making that
economic theories and tools of economic analysis make the greatest contribution in business.

If for instance, a business firm plans to launch a new product for which close substitutes are available
in the market, one method of deciding whether or not this product should be launched is to obtain
the services of a business consultant. The other method would be for the decision- maker or manager
to decide. In doing this, the manager would need to investigate and analyse the following thoroughly:
(a) production related issues; and,
(b) sales prospects and problems.
With regards to production, the manager will be required to collect and analyse information or data
on:
i. available production techniques;
ii. cost of production associated with each production technique;
iii. supply position of inputs required for the production process;
iv. input prices;
v. production costs of the competitive products; and,
vi. availability of foreign exchange, if inputs are to be imported.

Regarding the sales prospects and problems, the manager will be required to collect and analyze
data on:
a. general market trends;
b. the industrial business trends;
c. major existing and potential competitors, as well as theirrespective market shares;
d. prices of the competing products;
e. pricing strategies of the prospective competitors;
f. market structure and the degree of competition; and,
g. the supply position of complementary goods.

It is in this kind of input and output market analysis that knowledge of economic theories and tools of
economic analysis aid the process of decision making in a significant way. The application of
economic theories in solving business problems helps in facilitating decision-making in the following
ways:

First, it can give clear understanding of the various necessary economic concepts, including
demand, supply, cost, price, and the like that are used in business analysis.
Second, it can help in ascertaining the relevant variables and specifying the relevant data. For
example, in deciding what variables need to be considered in estimating the demand for two different
sources of energy, petrol and electricity.
Third, it provides consistency to business analysis and helps in arriving at right conclusions.
3.2 Scope of Managerial Economics
Managerial economics comprises both microeconomics and macroeconomics theories. Both
microeconomics and macroeconomics are applied to business analysis and decision making either
directly or indirectly. Generally, the scope of managerial economics extends to those economic
concepts, theories, and tools of analysis used in analysing the business environment, and to find
solutions to practical business problems. In broad terms, managerial economics is applied economics.
The areas of business issues to which economic theories can be directly applied is divided into two
broad categories:
a. Operational or internal issues; and,
b. Environment or external issues.

a. Operational issues are micro in nature and also internal i n nature. These problems include all
those problems which arise within the business organization and fall within the control of
management. Some of the basic internal issues include and questions that the management must
provide solutions to include:
i. choice of business and the nature of product (what to produce);
ii. choice of size of the firm (how much to produce);
iii. choice of technology (choosing the factor combination);
iv. choice of price (product pricing);
v. how to promote sales;
vi. how to face price competition;
vii. how to decide on new investments;
viii. how to manage profit and capital; and,
ix. how to manage inventory.

Some of the microeconomics theories that deals with most of these internal or operational issues
include:
Theory of demand: which explains the consumer behaviour in terms of decisions on whether or
not to buy a commodity and the quantity to be purchased.
Theory of Production and production decisions: The theory of production or theory of the firm
explains the relationship between inputs and output.
Analysis of Market structure and Pricing theory: Price theory explains how prices are determined
under different market conditions.
Profit analysis and profit management: Profit making is the most common business objective.
However, making a satisfactory profit is not always guaranteed due to business uncertainties. Profit
theory guides firms in the measurement and management of profits, in making allowances for the risk
premium, in calculating the pure return on capital and pure profit, and for future profit planning.
Theory of capital and investment decisions: Capital is the foundation of any business. It efficient
allocation and management is one of the most important tasks of the managers, as well as the
determinant of the firm’s success level. Some of the important issues related to capital include:
choice of investment project; assessing the efficiency of capital; and, the most efficient
allocation of capital.

b. Environmental or External issues are issues related to the general business environment. These
are issues related to the overall economic, social, and political atmosphere of the country in which
the business is situated. The factors constituting economic environment of a country include:
i. Type of economic system
ii. General trends in production, income, employment, prices, savings and investment.
iii. Structure of the financial institutions.
iv. Magnitude of and trends in foreign trade.
v. Trends in labour and capital markets.
vi. Government’s economic policies.
vii. Social organizations, such as trade unions, consumers’cooperatives, and producer unions.
viii. The political environment.
ix. The degree of openness of the economy.

Managerial economics is particularly concerned with those economic factors that form the business
climate. In macroeconomic terms, managerial economics focus on business cycles, economic growth,
and content and logic of some relevant government activities and policies which form the business
environment.
3.3 Managerial Economics and Gap between Theory and Practice
It is a general knowledge that there exists a gap between theory and practice in the world of economic
thinking and behaviour. By implication, a theory which appears logically sound might not be
directly applicable in practice. Take for instance, when there are economies of scale, it seems
theoretically sound that when inputs are doubled, output will be more or less doubled, and when
inputs are tripled, output would be more or less tripled. This theoretical conclusion may not hold in
practice.

Economic theories are highly simplistic because they are propounded on the basis of economic
models based on simplifying assumptions. Through economic models, economists create a
simplified world with its restrictive boundaries from which they derive their conclusions.
Although economic models are said to be an extraction from the real world, the closeness of this
extraction depends on how realistic the assumptions of the model are. It is a general belief that
assumptions of economic models are unrealistic in most cases. The most common assumption of
the economic models, as you may recall, is the ceteris paribus assumptions (that is all other things
being constant or equal). This assumption has been alleged to be the most unrealistic assumption.

Though economic theories are, no doubt, hypothetical in nature, in their abstract form however, they
do look divorced from reality. Abstract economic theories cannot be simply applied to real life
situations. This however, does not mean that economic models and theories do not serve useful
purposes. Microeconomic theory, for example, facilitates the understanding of what would be a
complicated confusion of billions of facts by constructing simplified models of behaviour that are
sufficiently similar to the actual phenomenon to be of help in understanding them. It cannot,
nevertheless, be denied the fact that there is a gap between economic theory and practice. The gap
arises from the fact that there exists a gap between the abstract world of economic models and the
real world.

It suffices to say that although economic theories do not directly offer custom-made solutions to
business problems, they provide a framework for logical economic thinking and analysis. The need
for such a framework arises because the real economic world is too complex to permit consideration
of every bit of economic facts that influence economic decisions. Economic analysis presents the
business decision makers with a road map; it guides them to their destinations, and does not take
them to their destinations.

Managerial economics can bridge the gap between economic theory and real world business
decisions. The managerial economic logic and tools of analysis guide business decision makers in:
i. identifying their problems in the achievement
ii. collecting the relevant data and related facts;
iii. processing and analysing the facts;
iv. drawing the relevant conclusions;
v. determining and evaluating the alternative means of achieving thegoal; and,
vi. taking a decision.

Without the application of economic logic and tools of analysis, business decisions may likely be
irrational and arbitrary. Irrationality is highly counter-productive.

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise 1


Managerial Economics is the integration of economic theory with business practices for the purpose
of facilitating decision-making by managers discuss.

Self-Assessment Exercise 2
How is Managerial Economics relevant to business managers?

Self-Assessment Exercise 3
Discuss the nature and scope of managerial economics.

Self-Assessment Exercise 4
1. How does Managerial Economics bridge the gap between theory and practice?
2. What are the major areas of business decision making?

5.0 Conclusion
This unit has been able to expose you to what managerial economics is all about and why it is
necessary to have it for effective business decisions. Managerial Economics comprises both micro-
and macro-economic theories. Its scope extends to those economic concepts, theories, and tools of
analysis used in the analysis of business environment, and to find solutions to practical business
problems.

6.0 Summary
To put some light to the understanding and appreciation of managerial economics as a tool of
business analysis, the unit focused on the following issues:
Economic analysis and business decisions, where it was pointed out that business decision-making
basically involves the selection of best out of alternative opportunities open to the business
enterprise.

From the scope of managerial economics, we discussed extensively some economic concepts and
tools used in analysing the business environment in order to seek for solutions to practical business
problems.

Managerial Economics and the gap between theory and practice, where it was pointed out that there
exists a gap between theory and practice in the world of economic thinking and behaviour.
Managerial economics can bridge this gap through logic and tools of analysis that guide business
decision makers.

7.0 References/Further Readings


Davis, R. & Chang, S. (1986). Principles of Managerial Economics, Prentice Hall, N.J.
Dwivedi, D. N. (2002). Managerial Economics, sixth edition. (New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House
Ltd).
Haynes, W. W. (1969). Managerial Economics: Analysis and Cases, Business Publications, Inc.,
Texas
Mansfield E. (ed.). (1996). Managerial Economics-Theory, Application and Cases, 3rd Edition, W.
W. Norton and Co., Inc., New York.
Salvatore, D. (1989). Managerial Economics, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Spencer, M. H. & Siegelman, L. (1976). Managerial Economics, Houghton Mifflin, Boston.

Self-Assessment Exercise 1 Answer


Managerial economics has been generally defined as the study of economic theories, logic and tools
of economic analysis, used in the process of business decision making. It involves the understanding
and use of economic theories and techniques of economic analysis in analyzing and solving business
problems.

Economic principles contribute significantly towards the performance of managerial duties as well as
responsibilities. Managers with some working knowledge of economics can perform their functions
more effectively and efficiently than those without such knowledge. Taking appropriate business
decisions requires a good understanding of the technical and environmental conditions under which
business decisions are taken. Application of economic theories and logic to explain and analyze
these technical conditions and business environment can contribute significantly to the rational
decision- making process.

Self-Assessment Exercise 2 Answer


There are three major contributions of economic theory to business economics have been enumerated
i. Building of analytical models that help to recognize the structure of managerial problems,
eliminate the minor details that can obstruct decision making, and help to concentrate on the
main problem area.
ii. Making available a set of analytical methods for business analyses thereby, enhancing the
analytical capabilities of the business analyst.
iii. Clarification of the various concepts used in business analysis, enabling the managers
avoids conceptual pitfalls.

Self-Assessment Exercise 3 Answer


Managerial economics comprises both microeconomics and macroeconomics theories. Both
microeconomics and macroeconomics are applied to business analysis and decision making either
directly or indirectly.
The areas of scope of managerial economics. They are:
a. Operational or internal issues; and,
b. Environment or external issues.

a. Operational issues are micro in nature and also internal i n nature. These problems include all
those problems which arise within the business organization and fall within the control of
management. Some of the basic internal issues include and questions that the management must
provide solutions to include:
i. choice of business and the nature of product (what to produce);
ii. choice of size of the firm (how much to produce);
iii. choice of technology (choosing the factor combination);
iv. choice of price (product pricing);
v. how to promote sales;
vi. how to face price competition;
vii. how to decide on new investments;
viii. how to manage profit and capital; and,
ix. how to manage inventory.

Some of the microeconomics theories that deals with most of these internal or operational issues
include:
Theory of demand: which explains the consumer behaviour in terms of decisions on whether or
not to buy a commodity and the quantity to be purchased.
Theory of Production and production decisions: The theory of production or theory of the firm
explains the relationship between inputs and output.
Analysis of Market structure and Pricing theory: Price theory explains how prices are determined
under different market conditions.
Profit analysis and profit management: Profit making is the most common business objective.
However, making a satisfactory profit is not always guaranteed due to business uncertainties. Profit
theory guides firms in the measurement and management of profits, in making allowances for the risk
premium, in calculating the pure return on capital and pure profit, and for future profit planning.
Theory of capital and investment decisions: Capital is the foundation of any business. It efficient
allocation and management is one of the most important tasks of the managers, as well as the
determinant of the firm’s success level. Some of the important issues related to capital include:
choice of investment project; assessing the efficiency of capital; and, the most efficient
allocation of capital.

b. Environmental or External issues are issues related to the general business environment. These are
issues related to the overall economic, social, and political atmosphere of the country in which the
business is situated. The factors constituting economic environment of a country include:
i. Type of economic system
ii. General trends in production, income, employment, prices, savings and investment.
iii. Structure of the financial institutions.
iv. Magnitude of and trends in foreign trade.
v. Trends in labour and capital markets.
vi. Government’s economic policies.
vii. Social organizations, such as trade unions, consumers’cooperatives, and producer unions.
viii. The political environment.
ix. The degree of openness of the economy.

Managerial economics is particularly concerned with those economic factors that form the business
climate. In macroeconomic terms, managerial economics focus on business cycles, economic growth,
and content and logic of some relevant government activities and policies which form the business
environment.

Self-Assessment Exercise 4 Answer


1. Though economic theories are, no doubt, hypothetical in nature, in their abstract form however,
they do look divorced from reality. Abstract economic theories cannot be simply applied to real life
situations. This however, does not mean that economic models and theories do not serve useful
purposes. Microeconomic theory, for example, facilitates the understanding of what would be a
complicated confusion of billions of facts by constructing simplified models of behaviour that are
sufficiently similar to the actual phenomenon to be of help in understanding them. It cannot,
nevertheless, be denied the fact that there is a gap between economic theory and practice. The gap
arises from the fact that there exists a gap between the abstract world of economic models and the
real world.

It suffices to say that although economic theories do not directly offer custom-made solutions to
business problems, they provide a framework for logical economic thinking and analysis. The need
for such a framework arises because the real economic world is too complex to permit consideration
of every bit of economic facts that influence economic decisions. Economic analysis presents the
business decision makers with a road map; it guides them to their destinations, and does not take
them to their destinations.

Self-Assessment Exercise 4 Answer


2. The managerial economic logic and tools of analysis guide business decision makers in:
i. Identifying their problems in the achievement
ii. Collecting the relevant data and related facts;
iii. Processing and analysing the facts;
iv. Drawing the relevant conclusions;
v. Determining and evaluating the alternative means of achieving thegoal; and,
vi. Taking a decision.
UNIT 2: THEORIES OF PROFIT
Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Types of Profit
3.1 Theories of Profit
3.1.1 Walker’s Theory of Profit: Profit as Rent of Ability
3.1.2 Clark’s Dynamic Theory
3.1.3 Hawley’s Risk Theory of Profit
3.1.4 Knight’s Theory of Profit
3.1.5 Schumpeter’s Innovation Theory of Profit
3.2 Monopoly Profit
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
The term profit means different things to different people. Business people, accountants, tax
collectors, employees, and economists have their individual meaning of profit. In its general sense,
profit is regarded as income accruing to equity holders, in the same sense as wages accrue to the
workers; rent accrues to owners of rentable assets; and, interest accrues to the money lenders. To the
accountant, ‘profit’ means the excess of revenue over all paid out costs, such as manufacturing and
overhead expenses. It is more like what is referredto a ‘net profit’. For practical purposes profit or
business income refers to profit in accounting sense. Economist’s concept of profit is the pure
profit or ‘economic profit’. Economic profit is a return over and above the opportunity cost, that is,
the income expected from the second alternative investment or use of business resources. In
this unit, emphasis will be placed on the various concepts of profit.

2.0 Leaning Outcomes


By the time you must have gone through this unit, you will be able to:
i. Define profit and differentiate between Accounting profit andpure Economic profit.
ii. Be familiar with the different theories of profit.
iii. Understand what is meant by monopoly profit.

3.0 Types of Profit


Before exposing you to the theories of profit, it will be helpful for you to distinguish between two
often misunderstood profit concepts: the Accounting profit and the Economic profit.

Accounting Profit
Accounting profit may be defined as follows:
Accounting Profit = TR – (w + r + I + m)
Where TR = Total Revenue; w = wages and salaries; r = rent; i = interest; and m = cost of
materials.
You can observe that when calculating accounting profit, it is only the explicit or book costs that are
considered and subtracted from the total revenue (TR).

Economic or Pure Profit


Unlike accounting profit, economic profit takes into account both the explicit costs and implicit or
imputed costs. The implicit or opportunity cost can be defined as the payment that would be
necessary to draw forth the factors of production from their most remunerative alternative use or
employment. Opportunity cost is the income is the income foregone which the business could expect
from the second best alternative use of resources. The foregone incomes referred to include interest,
salary, and rent, often called transfer costs.

Economic profit also makes provision for (a) insurable risks, (b) depreciation, (c) necessary minimum
payment to shareholders to prevent them from withdrawing their capital investments. Economic
profit may therefore be defined as ‘residual left after all contractual costs, including the transfer
costs of management, insurable risks, depreciation, and payments to shareholders have been met.
Thus,

Economic or Pure Profit = TR – EC – IC


where EC = Explicit Costs; and, IC = Implicit Costs.
Note that economic profit as defined by the above equation may necessarily not be positive. It may
be negative since it may be difficult to decide beforehand the best way of using the business
resources. Pure profit is a short-term phenomenon. It does not exist in the long-run under perfectly
competitive conditions.

3.1 Theories of Profit


The unsettled controversy on the sources of profit has led to the emergence of various theories of
profit in economics. The followingdiscussions summarise the main theories.

3.1.1 Walker’s Theory of Profit: Profit as Rent of Ability


One of the widely known theories of profit was stated by F. A. Walker who theorised ‘profit’ as the
rent of “exceptional abilities that an entrepreneur may possess” over others. He compare profit with
rent which is the difference between yields of the least and the most fertile lands while profit is the
difference between the earnings of the least and the most efficient entrepreneurs. Walker assumes a
state of perfect competition, in which all firms are presumed equal managerial ability. In Walker’s
view, under perfectly competitive conditions, there would be no pure or economic profit and all
firms would earn only marginal wages, which is popularly known in economics as ’normal profit’.

3.1.2 Clark’s Dynamic Theory


The J. B. Clark’s theory is of the opinion that profits arise in a dynamic economy, not in a static
economy. A static economy is defined as the one in which there is absolute freedom of
competition; population and capital are stationary; production process remains unchanged over time;
goods continue to remain homogeneous; there is freedom of factor mobility; there is no uncertainty
and no risk; and if risk exists, it is insurable. In a static economy therefore, firms make only the
‘normal profit’ or the wages of management.

A dynamic economy on the other hand, is characterized by the following generic changes:
(i) population increases;
(ii) increase in capital;
(iii) improvement in production technique;
(iv) changes in the forms of business organizations; and,
(v) multiplication of consumer wants.

The major functions of entrepreneurs or managers in a dynamic environment are in taking advantage
of the generic changes and promoting their businesses, expanding sales, and reducing costs. The
entrepreneurs who successfully take advantage of changing conditions in a dynamic economy
make pure profit. From Clark’s point of view, pure profit exists only in the short-run. In the long-run,
competition forces other firms to imitate changes made by the leading firms, leading to a rise in
demand for factors of production. Consequently, production costs rise, thus reducing profits,
especially when revenue remains unchanged.

3.1.3 Hawley’s Risk Theory of Profit


The risk theory of profit was initiated by F. B. Hawley in 1893. According to Hawley, risk in
business may arise due to such reasons as obsolescence of a product, sudden fall in the market
prices, non- availability of crucial raw materials, introduction of better substitutes by competitors,
risk due to fire, war and the like. Risk taking is regarded as an inevitable accompaniment of
dynamic production, and those who take risk have a sound claim of a separate reward, referred toas
‘profit’. Hawley simply refers to profit as the price paid by society for assuming business risk. He
suggests that businesspeople would not assume risk without expecting adequate compensation in
excess ofactuarial value, that is, premium on calculable risk.

3.1.4 Knight’s Theory of Profit


Frank Knight treated profit as a residual return to uncertainty bearing, not to risk bearing as in
the case of Hawley’s. Knight divided risk into calculable and non-calculable risks. Calculable risks
are those riskswhose probability of occurrence can be statistically estimated on thebasis of available
data. Examples of these types of risks are risks due to fire, theft, accidents, and the like. Calculable
risks are insurable. Those areas of risk in which the probability of its occurrence is non-
calculable, such as certain elements of production cost that cannot be accurately calculated, are not
insurable.

3.1.5 Schumpeter’s Innovation Theory of Profit


The innovation theory of profit was developed by Joseph A. Schumpeter. Schumpeter was of the
opinion that factors such as emergence of interest and profits, recurrence of trade cycles are only
incidental to a distinct process of economic development; and certain principles which could
explain the process of economic development would also explain these economic variables or factors.
Schumpeter’s theory of profit is thus embedded in his theory of economic growth.

In his explanation of the process of economic growth, Schumpeter began with the state of stationary
equilibrium, characterised by equilibrium in all spheres. Under conditions of stationary equilibrium,
total receipts from the business are exactly equal to the total cost outlay, and there is no profit.
According to the Schumpeter’s theory, profit can be made only by introducing innovations in
manufacturing technique, as well as in the methods of supplying the goods. Sources of innovation
include:
i. Introduction of new commodity or a better quality good;
ii. Introduction of new method of production;
iii. Opening of a new market;
iv. Discovery of new sources of raw material; and,
v. Organising the industry in an innovative manner with the newtechniques.

3.2 Monopoly Profit


Monopoly characterises a situation in the market in which there is a single seller of a commodity
without a close substitute. Observe that the profit theories presented above were propounded in the
background of the existence of perfect competition. But as conceived in the theoretical models,
perfect competition is either non-existent or is a rare phenomenon. An extreme opposite of perfect
competition is the existence of monopoly in the market. The term monopoly characterizes a market
situation in which there is a single seller of a commodity that does not have close substitutes.
Monopoly arises due to such factors as:
(i) economies of scale;
(ii) sole ownership;
(iii) legal sanction and protection; and,
(iv) mergers and acquisition.

A monopolist can earn pure or ‘monopoly’ profit and maintain it in the long run by using its
monopoly powers, including:
(i) powers to control price and supply;
(ii) powers to prevent entry of competitors by price cutting; and,
(iii) monopoly power in certain input markets.

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise 1


1. Discuss the basic difference between accounting profit and economic profit.
2. In your personal opinion, which of the different theories of profit you learned from this unit do
you think is more businesslike and why?

Self-Assessment Exercise 2
1. What are the distinguishing words between the key theories of profit: Walker’s Theory of
Profit, Clark’s Dynamic Theory, Hawley’s Risk Theory of Profit, Knight’s Theory of Profit
and Schumpeter’s Innovation Theory of Profit
2. In your personal opinion, which of the different theories of profit you learned from this unit do
you think is more businesslike and why?

5.0 Conclusion
This unit has presented another important aspect in the understanding and application of managerial
economics: the meaning and theories of profit. Though it was observed that profit means different
things to different people, you should bear in mind that, for practical purposes, profit or business
income refers to profit in accounting sense. The Economist’s concept of profit is the pure profit
defined as a return over and above the opportunity cost.

There are several important theories of profit among which are: the Walker’s theory; the Clark’s
dynamic theory; Hawley’s theory; Knight’s theory; and, the Schumpeter’s Innovation theory.

6.0 Summary
This unit serves as an important background to the study of managerial economics. It has presented
the basic definitions of profit, both in business accounting and economic terms. In accounting terms,
profit has been defined simply as the difference between revenue from sales and explicit or out-of-
pocket costs. In economic terms, profit was defined as the return over and above the opportunity
costs, that is, the income expected from the second alternative investment or use of business
resources. Economic profit makes provision for insurable risks, depreciation, and necessary minimum
payment to shareholders to prevent them from withdrawing their capital investments. It is also
defined as ‘the residual left after all contractual costs, including transfer costs of management,
insurable risks, depreciation, and payments to shareholders have been met.

The discussions on the theory of profits have exposed you to the different important theories of
profit, including: the Walker’s theory which refers to profit as rent of ability; the Clark’s dynamic
theory which assumes that profits arise in a dynamic economy, not in a static economy; the Hawley’s
risk theory, which refers to profit as the price paid by society for assuming business risk; the
Knight’s theory which looks at profit as a residual return to uncertainty bearing, not to risk bearing
as in Hawley’s theory; and, Schumpeter’s innovation theory, which is embedded in his theory of
economic growth. Schumpeter believes that profit can only be made by introducing innovations in
manufacturing techniques, as well as in the methods of supplying the goods produced.
7.0 References/Further Readings
Argyres, N., & Mayer, K. J. (2007). Contract design as a firm capability: An integration of learning
and transaction cost perspectives. Academy of Management Review, 32(4), 1060–1077.
Coase, R. (1937). The nature of the firm. Economica, New Series, 4(16), 386–405. Article first
published online, 19.
Hawley, F. B. (1893). The Risk Theory of Profit. Qly JL of Eco, July
Koutsoyiannis, A. (1979). Modern Microeconomics, 2nd Edition, Macmillian.
Langlois, R. N., & Robertson, P. L. (1995). Firms, markets and economic change. London:
Routledge.
Salvatore, D. (1989). Managerial Economics, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Schumpeter, J. A. (1938). Theory of Economic Development, Harvard University Press, Cambridge,
Mass.
Walker, F. A. (1887). The Source of Business Profits, Qly JL of Eco., April.
Williamson, O. E. (1963). Managerial Discretion and Business Behaviour. Am Eco. Rev.

Self-Assessment Exercise 1 Answer


1. Accounting profit is total revenue minus the cost of production. That is;
Accounting Profit = TR – (w + r + I + m)
Where TR = Total Revenue; w = wages and salaries; r = rent; i = interest; and m = cost of
materials. You can observe that when calculating accounting profit, it is only the explicit or book
costs that are considered and subtracted from the total revenue (TR).

Self-Assessment Exercise 1 Answer


2. Economic profit takes into account both the explicit costs and implicit or imputed costs. The
implicit or opportunity cost can be defined as the payment that would be necessary to draw forth
the factors of production from their most remunerative alternative use or employment. Opportunity
cost is the income is the income foregone which the business could expect from the second best
alternative use of resources. The foregone incomes referred to include interest, salary, and rent, often
called transfer costs.
Self-Assessment Exercise 2 Answer
1. Walker’s Theory of Profit: Walker assumes a state of perfect competition, in which all firms are
presumed equal managerial ability. In Walker’s view, under perfectly competitive conditions, there
would be no pure or economic profit and all firms would earn only marginal wages, which is
popularly known in economics as ’normal profit’.

Clark’s Dynamic Theory: From Clark’s point of view, pure profit exists only in the short-run. In the
long-run, competition forces other firms to imitate changes made by the leading firms, leading to a
rise in demand for factors of production. Consequently, production costs rise, thus reducing profits,
especially when revenue remains unchanged.

Hawley’s Risk Theory of Profit: Hawley simply refers to profit as the price paid by society for
assuming business risk. He suggests that businesspeople would not assume risk without expecting
adequate compensation in excess ofactuarial value, that is, premium on calculable risk.

Knight’s Theory of Profit: Frank Knight treated profit as a residual return to uncertainty
bearing,not to risk bearing as in the case of Hawley’s. Knight divided risk into calculable and non-
calculable risks. Calculable risks are those risks whose probability of occurrence can be statistically
estimated on the basis of available data.

Schumpeter’s Innovation Theory of Profit: Schumpeter was of the opinion that factors such as
emergence of interest and profits, recurrence of trade cycles are only incidental to a distinct process
of economic development; and certain principles which could explain the process of economic
development would also explain these economic variables or factors. Schumpeter’s theory of profit is
thus embedded in his theory of economic growth.

Self-Assessment Exercise 2 Answer


2. The Schumpeter’s innovation theory of profit is more business like because it explains the process
of economic growth through innovation. Schumpeter began with the state of stationary equilibrium,
characterized by equilibrium in all spheres. Under conditions of stationary equilibrium, total receipts
from the business are exactly equal to the total cost outlay, and there is no profit. According to the
Schumpeter’s theory, profit can be made only by introducing innovations in manufacturing
technique, as well asin the methods of supplying the goods.
UNIT 3: PROFIT MAXIMISATION AS A BUSINESS OBJECTIVE
Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Profit Maximisation as Business Objective
3.1 Profit-Maximising Conditions
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
The conventional economic theory assumes that profit maximisation is the only objective of business
firms. Profit maximisation forms the basis of conventional price theory. It is the most reasonable,
analytical, and ‘productive’ business objective. This unit begins by familiarizing you with the
necessary and sufficient conditions for profit maximisation, followed by in depth presentations
and business examples.

2.0 Learning Outcomes


At the end of this unit, you will be expected to:
i. Understand the reason a firm sets its objective to be that of profit maximisation
ii. Know the necessary and sufficient conditions for profit maximisation.
iii. Solve problems involving profit maximisation.

3.0 Profit Maximization as Business Objective


Profit maximisation has been the most important assumption on which economists have built price
and production theories. This hypothesis has, however been strongly questioned and alternative
hypothesis suggested. The conventional economic theory assumes profit maximisation as the only
objective of business firms. Profit maximization as the objective of business firms has long history in
economic literature. It forms the basis of conventional price theory. Profit maximisation is regarded as
the most reasonable and analytically the most ‘productive’ business objective. The strength of this
assumption lies in the fact that this assumption has never been unambiguously disproved.

Besides, profit maximisation assumption has a greater predictive power. It helps in predicting the
behavior of business firms in the real world and also the behavior of price and output under different
market conditions. No alternative hypothesis explains and predicates the behaviour of firms better
than the profit maximization assumption.

3.1 Profit Maximisation Conditions


Total profit (𝛑) is defined as:
𝛑 = 𝐓𝐑 − 𝐓𝐂 (3.1)
Where 𝐓𝐑 = total revenue while 𝐓𝐂 = total cost.
There are two conditions that must be fulfilled for equation (3.1) to be maximised.
These conditions are called
i. necessary or first order condition
ii. sufficient or second order condition

i. The necessary or first order condition requires that marginal revenue (𝐌𝐑) must be equal to
marginal cost(𝐌𝐂). By definition, marginal revenue is the revenue obtained from the production and
sale of one additional unit of output while the marginal cost is the cost arising due to the production of
additional unit of output.
ii. The sufficient or second order condition requires that that necessary condition must be satisfied
under the condition of decreasing 𝐌𝐑 and rising 𝐌𝐂.
The profit maximisating conditions can be presented mathematically as follows:
𝛑 = 𝐓𝐑 − 𝐓𝐂
Suppose the total revenue and total cost functions are given as:
𝐓𝐑 = 𝐟(𝐐)
and
𝐓𝐂 = 𝐟(𝐐)
where 𝐐 = quantity produced and sold
By substituting total revenue and total cost function in equation (3.1), the profit function
𝛑 = 𝐟(𝐐)𝐓𝐑 − 𝐟(𝐐)𝐓𝐂 (3.2)
The necessary or first order condition requires that marginal revenue (MR) must be equal to marginal
cost (MC).
dTR
= MR (3.3)
dQ
dTC
= MC (3.4)
dQ

MR = MC (3.5)
The sufficient or second order condition requires that that necessary condition must be satisfied under
the condition of decreasing 𝐌𝐑 and rising 𝐌𝐂.
𝐝𝐌𝐑
Slope of MR = 𝐝𝐐
𝐝𝐌𝐂
Slope of MC = 𝐝𝐐
𝐝𝐌𝐑 𝐝𝐌𝐂
<
𝐝𝐐 𝐝𝐐

Or
𝛛𝟐 𝛑 𝛛𝟐 𝐓𝐑 𝛛𝟐 𝐓𝐂
= − <𝟎
𝛛𝐐𝟐 𝛛𝐐𝟐 𝛛𝐐𝟐

𝛛𝟐 𝐓𝐑 𝐝𝐌𝐑
=
𝛛𝐐𝟐 𝐝𝐐

∂2 TC dMC
=
∂Q2 dQ
𝐝𝐌𝐑 𝐝𝐌𝐂
<
𝐝𝐐 𝐝𝐐

This shows that the slope of MR is less than (<) slope of MC for a firm to maximise profit.

This can all be explained graphically using the marginal conditions, The MC is the marginal cost
curve while the MR is the marginal revenue curve. The MC intercepts the MR curve at point P 1 and
point P2. Thus, the first order condition is satisfied at both points (P1 and P2) but the second order
condition of the profit maximization is satisfied only at point P2 with output Q2. The second order
condition requires that its slope of marginal revenue to the less than the slope of the marginal cost. On
the other hand, the second order condition requires that its second derivative of the profit function is
negative. When second derivative of the profit function is negative, it implies that the total profit
curve has turned downward after having reached he peak, that is, the highest point on the profit scale.

Marginal Revenue and Cost


C

R P1

M
P2 C

M
R
0 Q1 Q2
Figure 3.1: Marginal Conditions for Profit Maximisation

Example
Suppose demand and total cost functions for a monopolist firm are given below:
Price function: 𝑃 = 500 − 5𝑄 (3.6)
Total Cost function: 𝑇𝐶 = 50 + 20𝑄 + 𝑄 2 (3.7)
(i) Find the profit maximizing output
(ii) Output price
(iii) Calculate the profit of the firm.

Solution
(i) 𝑃 = 500 − 5𝑄
𝑇𝐶 = 50 + 20𝑄 + 𝑄 2
𝑇𝑅 = 𝑃𝑄
𝑇𝑅 = (500 − 5𝑄)𝑄
𝑇𝑅 = 500𝑄 − 5𝑄 2 (3.8)
You are required to apply the first-order condition for profit
maximisation and determine the profit-maximising level of output.
According to the first-order condition (necessary condition), profit is maximized where:
MR =MC
𝑑TR
= 𝑀𝑅
𝑑𝑄

𝑀𝑅 = 500 − 10𝑄 (3.9)


𝑑𝑇𝐶
= 𝑀𝐶
𝑑𝑄

𝑀𝐶 = 20 + 2𝑄 (3.10)
𝑀𝑅 = 𝑀𝐶
500 − 10𝑄 = 20 + 2𝑄
500 − 20 = 2𝑄 + 10𝑄
480 = 12𝑄
𝑄 = 40
40 units is the profit maximizing output
The output level of 40 units satisfies the first-order condition.
Let us seeif it satisfies the second-order condition.

Recall that the second-order condition requires that:


𝑑𝑀𝑅 𝑑(500−10𝑄)
= = -10
𝑑𝑄 𝑑𝑄
𝑑𝑀𝐶 𝑑(20+2𝑞)
= =2
𝑑𝑄 𝑑𝑄
𝑑𝑀𝑅 𝑑𝑀𝐶
<
𝑑𝑄 𝑑𝑄

-10 < 2

Thus the second-order condition is also satisfied at the output level of 40 units because slope MR is
decreasing (-10) while slope of MC is raising (2).
(ii)
𝑃 = 500 − 5𝑄
𝑃 = 500 − 5(40)
𝑃 = 300
Profit maximizing price is 300
(iii) Profit (𝜋)
𝜋 = 500𝑄 − 5𝑄 2 − 50 − 20𝑄 − 𝑄 2 (3.11)
= 500(40) − 5(40)2 − 50 − 20(40) − (40)2
𝜋 = 9550

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise 1


1. Explain mathematically the conditions for profit maximization of a firm.
2. Assuming a price function as:
𝑃 = 90 − 2𝑄
And a cost function as:
𝐶 = 10 + 0.5𝑄 2
Find profit maximising output and price.

Self-Assessment Exercises 2
Discuss the short-run objective of firm.

5.0 Conclusion
This unit has presented another important aspect in the understanding and application of managerial
economics: the meaning and theories of profit. Though it was observed that profit means different
things to different people, you should bear in mind that, for practical purposes, profit or business
income refers to profit in accounting sense. The Economist’s concept of profit is the pure profit
defined as a return over and above the opportunity cost.

There are several important theories of profit among which are: the Walker’s theory; the Clark’s
dynamic theory; Hawley’s theory; Knight’s theory; and, the Schumpeter’s Innovation theory.

6.0 Summary
This unit informs you that profit maximisation objective helps in predicting the behaviour of business
firms in the real world, as well as in predicting the behaviour of price and output under different
market conditions. In the discussions, you noted that profit can basically be defined as the difference
between revenue and costs. To maximize profit, marginal revenue is equated with marginal cost.
We refer to this as the first-order condition. The second-order condition requires that the first-order
condition must be satisfied under the condition of decreasing marginal revenue (MR) and increasing
marginal cost (MC).

7.0 References/ Further Readings


Dwivedi, D. N. (2002). Managerial Economics, sixth edition (New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House
Ltd).
Haessuler, E. F. & Paul, R. S. (1976). Introductory Mathematical Analysis for Students of Business
and Economics, 2nd edition (Reston Virginia: Reston Publishing Company)
Landsg, S. (2002). Price Theory and Applications, (fifth ed.). South-Western.
Lipsey, R. G. (1975). An introduction to positive economics (fourth ed.). Weidenfeld and Nicolson.
pp. 214–7. ISBN 0-297-76899-9.
Samuelson, W., & Marks, S. (2003). Managerial Economics, (fourth ed.). Wiley

Self-Assessment Exercise 1 Answer


1. The profit maximisating conditions can be presented mathematically as follows:
𝛑 = 𝐓𝐑 − 𝐓𝐂
Suppose the total revenue and total cost functions are given as:
𝐓𝐑 = 𝐟(𝐐)
and
𝐓𝐂 = 𝐟(𝐐)
where 𝐐 = quantity produced and sold
By substituting total revenue and total cost function into the profit function
𝛑 = 𝐟(𝐐)𝐓𝐑 − 𝐟(𝐐)𝐓𝐂
The necessary or first order condition requires that marginal revenue (MR) must be equal to marginal
cost (MC).
dTR
= MR
dQ
dTC
= MC
dQ

MR = MC

The sufficient or second order condition requires that that necessary condition must be satisfied under
the condition of decreasing 𝐌𝐑 and rising𝐌𝐂.
𝐝𝐌𝐑
Slope of MR = 𝐝𝐐
𝐝𝐌𝐂
Slope of MC = 𝐝𝐐
𝐝𝐌𝐑 𝐝𝐌𝐂
𝐝𝐐
< 𝐝𝐐

Or
𝛛𝟐 𝛑 𝛛𝟐 𝐓𝐑 𝛛𝟐 𝐓𝐂
= − <𝟎
𝛛𝐐𝟐 𝛛𝐐𝟐 𝛛𝐐𝟐

𝛛𝟐 𝐓𝐑 𝐝𝐌𝐑
=
𝛛𝐐𝟐 𝐝𝐐

∂2 TC dMC
=
∂Q2 dQ
𝐝𝐌𝐑 𝐝𝐌𝐂
<
𝐝𝐐 𝐝𝐐

This shows that the slope of MR is less than (<) slopes of MC for a firm to maximize profit.

Self-Assessment Exercise 1 Answer


2. 𝑃 = 90 − 2𝑄
𝑇𝐶 = 10 + 0.5𝑄 2
𝑇𝑅 = 𝑃𝑄
𝑇𝑅 = (90 − 2𝑄)𝑄
𝑇𝑅 = 90𝑄 − 2𝑄 2
𝑀𝑅 = 𝑀𝐶
𝛿𝑇𝑅
= 𝑀𝑅
𝛿𝑄

𝑀𝑅 = 90 − 4𝑄
𝛿𝑇𝐶
𝛿𝑄
= 𝑀𝐶
𝑀𝐶 = 𝑄
𝑀𝑅 = 𝑀𝐶
90 − 4𝑄 = 𝑄
90 = 𝑄 + 4𝑄
5𝑄 = 90
𝑄 = 18
18 units is the profit maximizing output.

Output price
𝑃 = 90 − 2𝑄
Where Q = 18
𝑃 = 90 − 2(18)
𝑃 = 90 − 36
𝑃 = 54
Price is 54

Self-Assessment Exercises 2 Answer


Profit maximisation has been the most important assumption on which economists have built price
and production theories. This hypothesis has, however been strongly questioned and alternative
hypothesis suggested. The conventional economic theory assumes profit maximisation as the only
objective of business firms. Profit maximization as the objective of business firms has long history in
economic literature. It forms the basis of conventional price theory. Profit maximisation is regarded as
the most reasonable and analytically the most ‘productive’ business objective. The strength of this
assumption lies in the fact that this assumption has never been unambiguously disproved.

Besides, profit maximisation assumption has a greater predictive power. It helps in predicting the
behavior of business firms in the real world and also the behavior of price and output under different
market conditions. No alternative hypothesis explains and predicates the behaviour of firms better
than the profit maximization assumption.
UNIT 4: OTHER BUSINESS OBJECTIVES
Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Other Relevant Business Objectives
3.1 Sales Revenue Maximisation
3.2 Maximisation of Firm’s Growth Rate
3.3 Managerial Utility Maximisation
3.4 Long-run Survival and Market-share
3.5 Entry-prevention and Risk-avoidance
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
Apart from profit maximisation, as you all know, business firms have the following objectives:
i. Maximisation of Sales revenue
ii. Maximisation of the growth rate
iii. Maximisation of manager’s utility function
iv. Long-run survival of the firm
v. Entry-prevention and risk-avoidance.

In this unit, we discuss these other business objectives with the aim of acquainting you with the
several reasons an entrepreneur will choose to be in business.
2.0 Learning Outcomes
Having gone through this unit, you will be able to:
i. Be more informed on objectives of a business organisation
ii. Know the techniques of maximising revenue, output, and minimising costs
iii. Be able to make effective decisions for business expansion andgrowth.

3.0 Other Relevant Business Objectives


3.1 Sales Revenue Maximisation
It was one famous economist, W. J. Baumol, who introduced the hypothesis of Sales Revenue
maximisation as an alternative to the profit-maximisation objective. Baumol’s reason for the
introduction of this hypothesis is the usual dichotomy between business ownership and management,
especially in large corporations. This dichotomy, according to Baumol, gives managers some
opportunity to set their personal goals other than profit maximisation goal which business owners
pursue. Given the opportunity, managers would want to maximise their own utility function. And,
the most plausible factor in managers’ utility functions is the maximisation of sales revenue.
Baumol lists the factors that explain the managers’ pursuance of thisgoal as follows:

First, salary and other monetary benefits of managers tend to be more closely related to sales revenue
than to profits.
Second, banks and other financial institutions look at sales revenue while financing business
ventures.
Third, trend in sales revenue is a readily available indicator of a firm’s performance.
Fourth, increasing sales revenue enhances manager’s prestige while profits go to the business owners.
Fifth, managers find profit maximisation a difficult objective to fulfill consistently over time and at
the same level. Profits fluctuate with changing economic conditions.
Finally, growing sales tend to strengthen competitive spirit of the firm in the market, and vice
versa.

• Technique of Total Revenue Maximisation


As noted earlier, total revenue (TR) can be defined by
𝑇𝑅 = 𝑃𝑄 (4.1)
where P refers to unit price and Q refers to quantity sold.
The optimisation problem here is to find the value of Q that maximises total revenue. The rule for
maximising total revenue is that total revenue will be maximized at the level of sales (Q) for which
marginal (MR) = 0. In other words, the revenue from the sale of the marginal unit of the product
must be equal to zero at the point of maximum revenue.

The marginal revenue (MR) is the first derivative of the total revenue (TR) function. For example, we
want to find the level of Q for which revenue will be maximized if the price function is given by:

𝑃 = 500 − 5𝑄 (4.2)
Then from equation (3.1.1)
𝑇𝑅 = 𝑃𝑄 = (500 − 5𝑄)𝑄
= 500𝑄 − 5𝑄 2 (4.3)
dTR
Marginal Revenue (MR) = = 500 − 10Q = 0 (4.4)
dQ

Setting equation (4.4) equal to zero according to the rule, we get:


500 − 10𝑄 = 0
500 – 10Q = 0 (4.5)
solving for Q in equation (4.5), we get:
500 = 10𝑄
500
𝑄= 10

𝑄 = 50
This indicates that the revenue-maximising level of output is 50 units.
The maximum total revenue can be obtained by substituting 50 for Q in the total revenue function,
𝑇𝑅 = 500𝑄 − 5𝑄 2
Thus, 𝑇𝑅 = 500(50) − 5(502 )
= 25,000 – 12,500
= N12,500.
• Technique of Output Maximisation
Minimisation of Average Cost
The optimum size of the firm is the size minimises the average cost of production. This is
also referred to as the most efficient size of the firm. Knowledge of the optimum size of a firm is
very importantfor future planning under three important conditions:

First, a businessperson planning to set up a new production unit would like to know the optimum
size of the plant for future planning. This issue arises because, as the theory of production
indicates, the average cost of production in most productive activities decreases to a certain level of
output and then begins to increase.
Second, the firms planning to expand their scale of production would like to know the most efficient
level of the economies of scale so that they can be able to plan the marketing of the product
accordingly.
Third, businesspeople working under competitive business environment are faced with a given
market price. Their profit therefore, depends on their ability to reduce their unit cost of production.
And, given the technology and input prices, the prospect of reducing unit cost of production
depends on the size of production. The problem decision makers’ face under this condition is how to
find the optimum level of output or the level of output that minimises the average cost of production.

As implied earlier, under general production conditions, the optimum level of output is the
one that minimises the average cost (AC), where the average cost can be defined as the ratio
between totalcost (TC) and quantity produced (Q). Thus,
𝑇𝐶
𝐴𝐶 = (4.6)
𝑄

Suppose the total cost function of a firm is given by:


𝑇𝐶 = 100 + 60𝑄 4𝑄 2 (4.7)
then,
100+60𝑄+4𝑄 2
𝐴𝐶 = 𝑄
100
𝐴𝐶 = + 60 + 4𝑄
𝑄

= 100𝑄 −1 + 60 + 4𝑄 (4.8)
The problem here is to find the value of Q that minimises the average cost, as represented in equation
(4.8).

The Minimisation Rule: Like the maximisation rule, the minimization rule is that the derivative of
the function to be minimised must be equal to zero. It follows that the value the value of output (Q)
that minimises average cost (AC) can be obtained by taking the first derivative of the AC function
and setting it equal to zero and solving for Q.
Thus, in the current example,
𝑑𝐴𝐶 𝑑(100𝑄 −1 +60+4𝑄) −100
= = + 4 (4.9)
𝑑𝑄 𝑑𝑄 𝑄2

Setting equation (4.9) equal to zero, we get:


−100
+ 4 =0
𝑄2
−100
= −4
𝑄2
−4𝑄 2 = −100
−100
𝑄2 = = 25
−4

𝑄= 5
Thus, the level of output that minimises average cost is 5 units.

3.2 Maximisation of Firm’s Growth Rate


According to Robin Marris, managers attempt to maximise a firm’s balanced growth rate, subject to
managerial and financial constraints.Marris defines firm’s balanced growth rate (G) as:
𝐺 = 𝐺𝐷 = 𝐺𝐶 (4.10)
where GD and GC are growth rate of demand for the firm’s product and growth rate of capital
supply to the firm, respectively.

Simply stated, a firm’s growth rate is said to be balanced when demand for its product and supply
of capital to the firm increase at the same rate.
Marris translated these two growth rates into two utility functions: (i) manager’s utility function
(Um), and (ii)
business owner’s utility function (Uo), where:
Um = f(salary, power, job security, prestige, status) (4.11)
Uo = f(output, capital, market-share, profit, public esteem). (4.12)
The maximisation of business owner’s utility (Uo) implies maximisation
of demand for the firm’s product or growth of the supply of capital.

3.3 Managerial Utility Maximisation


O. E. Williamson propounded the hypothesis of maximisation of managerial utility function. He
argues that managers have the freedom to pursue objectives other than profit maximisation.
Managers seek to maximise their own utility function subject to a minimum level of profit. According
to Williamson, manager’s utility function can be expressed as:
U = f(S, M, ID) (4.13)
where S = additional expenditure on staffM = managerial emoluments
ID = discretionary investments

According to the hypothesis, managers attempt to maximise their utility function subject to a
satisfactory profit. A minimum profit is necessary to satisfy the shareholders or else the manager’s
job security will be at stake.

3.4 Long-run Survival and Market-share


K. W. Rothschild proposed the hypothesis of long-run survival and market-share goals. According to
the hypothesis, the primary goal of the firm is long-run survival. Other economists suggest that
attainment and retention of a constant market share is an additional objective of the firms.
Managers therefore, seek to secure their market share and long- run survival. The firms may seek to
maximise their long-run profit, which may not be certain.

3.5 Entry-prevention and Risk-avoidance


Other alternative objectives of business firms as suggested by economists are the prevention of
entry of new firms and risk avoidance. It is argued that the motive behind entry-prevention may be
any or all of the followings:
(a) profit maximisation in the long-run; (b) securing a constantmarket share; and,
(c) avoidance of risk caused by unpredictable behaviour of newfirms.
The advocates of profit maximisation as business objective argue, however, that only profit-
maximising firms can survive in the long-run. Firms can achieve all other subsidiary objectives and
goals easily only if they can maximise their profits.

Another argument is that prevention of entry may be the major objective in the pricing policy of the
firm, particularly in the case of limit pricing. But the motive behind entry- prevention is to secure a
constant share inthe market, which is compatible with profit maximisation.

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise


Outline the long-run objectives of firms.

5.0 Conclusion
Profit maximisation has been the prime objective of classical business organizations. To maximise
profit, certain conditions must be met, the first being that at optimum profit- maximising point, the
firm’s marginal revenue must equal marginal cost. Second, to ensure that maximum profit is
attained, the second derivative of the profit function is expectedto be less than zero.

6.0 Summary
This unit stresses the point that managers often set their personal goals different from profit
maximisation, the goal usually pursued by business owners. Some good examples of such manager
objectives are sales, growth rate, and maximisation of utility function. The factors explaining this
include the fact that:

First, salary and other monetary benefits of managers tend to be more closely related to sales revenue
than to profits.
Second, banks and other financial institutions look at sales revenue while financing business
ventures.
Third, trend in sales revenue is a readily available indicator of a firm’s performance.
Fourth, increasing sales revenue enhances manager’s prestige while profits go to the business owners.
Fifth, managers find profit maximisation a difficult objective to fulfill consistently over time and at
the same level. Profits fluctuate with changing economic conditions.
Finally, growing sales tend to strengthen competitive spirit of the firm in the market, and vice
versa.

Other similar objectives include: making satisfactory profit rate, long- run survival of the firm, and
entry-prevention and risk-avoidance. Knowledge of these other business objectives is essential for
management decisions.

7.0 References/Further Readings


Allen, R. G. D. (1956). Mathematical Analysis for Economists, Macmillan, London.
Baumol, W. J. (1977). Economic Theory and Operations Analysis, Englewood Cliffe, N. J. 4th
Edition.
Chiang, A. C. (1984). Fundamental Methods Mathematical Economists, 3rd Edition. McGraw-Hill,
NewYork.
Dwivedi, D. N. (2002). Managerial Economics, sixth edition. (New Delhi: Vikas
Publishing House Ltd).
Haessuler, E. F. & Paul, R. S. (1976). Introductory Mathematical Analysis for Students of Business
and Economics, 2nd edition (Reston Virginia: Reston Publishing Company).

Self-Assessment Exercises Answer


i. Maximisation of Sales revenue
ii. Maximisation of the growth rate
iii. Maximisation of manager’s utility function
iv. Long-run survival of the firm
v. Entry-prevention and risk-avoidance.
UNIT 5: CONTRAINED OPTIMISATION
Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Constrained Optimisation Techniques
3.1 Constrained Optimisation by Substitution Method
3.2 Contrained Optimisation by Lagrangian Multiplier Method
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
The maximisation and minimization techniques as referred to and discussed in the previous units are
generally referred to in economics as unconstrained optimisation or minimisation, as the case may be.
They are unconstrained in the sense that firms are assumed to operate underno constraints on their
activities. In the real business world however, firms face serious resource constraints. They need, for
example, to maximise output with given quantity of capital and labour time. The techniques used to
optimise the business objective(s) under constraints are referred to as constrained optimisation
techniques. There are three common techniques of optimisation include:
i. Linear Programming,
ii. constrained optimisation by substitution, and
iii. Lagrangian multiplier.

The linear programming technique has a wide range of applications and should be a subject in itself,
usually discussed in detail under quantitative techniques in economics. This discussion will attempt
to summarise the two other important techniques, that is, constrained optimisation by substitution and
Lagrangian multiplier.
2.0 Learning Outcomes
At the end of this unit, you will be expected to:
i. Understand the meaning and importance of constrained optimisation
ii. Know the applicable techniques in constrained optimisation
iii. be able to apply optimisation principles in business decisions

3.0 Constrained Optimisation Techniques


There are basically two mostly used optimisation techniques including: the substitution method; and,
the Lagrangian multiplier method

3.1 Constrained Optimisation by Substitution Method


This technique will be illustrated in two ways:
(i) constrained profit maximisation problem, and
(ii) constrained cost minimisation problems.

i. Constrained Profit Maximisation


Let the profit function of a hypothetical firm be given as:
𝜋 = 𝑓(𝑋, 𝑌) = 100𝑋 − 2𝑋 2 – 𝑋𝑌 + 180𝑌 − 4𝑌 2 (5.1)
Where X and Y represent two products.
We wish to maximise equation (5.1) subject to the constraint that the sum of the output of X and Y be
equal to 30 units. That is,
𝑋 + 𝑌 = 30 (5.2)
Solving by the substitution method, we obtain as follows:
First note that the process of the substitution method involves two steps
i. express one of the variables (X or Y in this case) in terms of the other and solve the constraint
equation for one of them (X or Y), and
ii. substitute the solution obtained into the objective function (that is, the function to be maximized
or the profit function) and solve the outcome for the other variable.
Solution
Given the constraint equation (5.2), we solve for the values of X and Y in terms of one another to
obtain:
𝑋 = 30 − 𝑌 𝑜𝑟 𝑌 = 30 − 𝑋
By substituting the value of X into the profit equation (5.1), we obtain:
𝜋 = 100(30 − 𝑌) − 2(30 − 𝑌)2 − (30 − 𝑌)𝑌 + 180𝑌 − 4𝑌 2
= 3000 − 100𝑌 − 2(900 − 60𝑌 − 𝑌 2 ) − 30𝑌 + 𝑌 2 + 180𝑌 − 4𝑌 2
= 3000 − 100𝑌 − 1800 − 120𝑌 − 2𝑌 2 ) − 30𝑌 + 𝑌 2 + 180𝑌 − 4𝑌 2
= 1200 + 170𝑌 − 5𝑌 2 (5.3)

Equation (5.3) can now be maximised by obtaining the first derivative and setting it equal to zero
and solving for Y:
𝛿𝜋
= = 170 − 10𝑌 = 0 (5.4)
𝛿𝑌

Solving equation (5.4) for Y, we get:


10𝑌 = 170
𝑌 = 17

Substituting 17 for Y into the constraint equation (5.2), we get:


𝑋 + 17 = 30
𝑋 = 13
It follows that the optimum solution for the constrained profit maximisation problem is X= 13 units
and Y = 17 units. This values of X and Y satisfies the constraint. Expressed differently, the firm
maximises profit by producing and selling 13 units of product X and 17 units of product Y.
The maximum profit under the given constraint can now be obtained by substituting the above values
of X and Y into the profit function, equation (5.1):
𝜋 = (𝑋, 𝑌) = (13, 17) = 100(13) − 2(13)2 − (13)(17) + 180(17) − 4(17)2
= 2645
Thus, the maximum profit under constraint is N2,645. It can be shown that maximum profits under
constraints is less than maximum profits without constraints which is N2,800.

ii. Constrained Cost Minimisation


We now apply the substitution method to the problem of constrained cost minimisation. Suppose
the cost function of a firm producing two goods, X and Y, is given by:
𝑇𝐶 = 2𝑋 2 − 𝑋𝑌 + 3𝑌 2
and the firm must meet a combined order of 36 units of the two goods. The problem is to find and
optimum combination of the products X and Y that minimises the cost of production. Alternatively
stated, we

Minimise 𝑇𝐶 = 2𝑋 2 − 𝑋𝑌 + 3𝑌 2 (5.5)
Subject to 𝑋 + 𝑌 = 36 (5.6)
Again, substitution method requires that the constraint equation (5.6) is expressed in terms of any
of the two goods, X and Y, and then substituted into the objective function (equation (5.5).
Expressing X in terms of Y, we get:
𝑋 = 36 − 𝑌 (5.7)

Substituting equation (5.7) for X in the objective function, you get:


𝑇𝐶 = 2(36 − 𝑌)2 − (36 − 𝑌)𝑌 + 3𝑌 2
= 2(1296 − 72𝑌 + 𝑌 2 ) − 36𝑌 + 𝑌 2 + 3𝑌 2
= 2592 − 144𝑌 + 2𝑌 2 − 36𝑌 + 𝑌 2 + 3𝑌 2
= 2592 − 180𝑌 + 6𝑌 2 (5.8)

According to the optimisation rule, for the now objective function (equation (5.8) to be minimised,
the first derivative must be equal to zero, viz:
𝛿𝑇𝐶
= 180 + 12𝑌 = 0 (5.9)
𝛿𝑌

Solving for Y in equation (5.9), we get the value of Y as follows:


12𝑌 = 180
𝑌 = 15
Substituting Y into the equation (5.7), you get:
𝑋 = 36 − 15
𝑋 = 21

Thus, the optimum solution demands that 21 units of X and 15 units of Y minimise the cost of
meeting the combined order of 36 units that is,( 21 + 15 = 36 units). The minimum cost of
producing 21 units of X and 15 units of Y can be obtained as follows, using equation (5.5), the
objective function:
Minimum Cost = 2(21)2 − (21)(15) + 3(15)2
= 882 − 315 + 675
= 1242
Thus, the minimum cost of producing the combined order is N1,242.

3.2 Constrained Optimisation by Lagrangian Multiplier Method


The lagrangian method is most useful in solving complex optimisation problems. In this discussion,
we summarise this method using two illustrations:
i. constrained profit maximisation problem, and
ii. constrained cost minimisation problem

i. Constrained Profit Maximisation


We refer to the profit function of equation (5.1), with some constraint imposed, so that we:
Maximise
(𝑋, 𝑌) = 100𝑋 − 2𝑋 2 – 𝑋𝑌 + 180𝑌 − 4𝑌 2
Subject to
𝑋 + 𝑌 = 30
The basic approach of the Lagrangian method is to combine the objective function and the
constraint equation to form a Lagrangian function. This is then solved using partial first-order
derivatives.
The Lagrangian function is formulated simply by:
First, setting the constraint equation (5.2) equal to zero:
𝑋 + 𝑌 − 30 = 0 (5.10)
Second, multiplying the resulting equation by 𝜆 (Greek letter,“lambda”):
𝜆(𝑋 + 𝑌 − 30)
Adding this to the objective function, we get the Lagrangian function as:
Z = 100𝑋 − 2𝑋 2 – 𝑋𝑌 + 180𝑌 − 4𝑌 2 + 𝜆((𝑋 + 𝑌 − 30) (5.11)
Equation (5.11) is the Lagrangian function with three unknowns, X, Y, and. The values of these
unknowns that maximise Z will also maximize Profit ((𝜋). The Greek letter, is referred to as
the Lagrangian multiplier. It measures the impact of a small change in the constraint on the objective
functions.

We are now required to maximise Z f r o m equation (5.11). To do this, wefirst obtain the partial
derivatives of Z with respect to X, Y, and and set each equal to zero to satisfy the first-order
condition for optimisation. This will give rise to a simultaneous equation system in three unknowns,
X, Y, and as indicated below:
Z = 100𝑋 − 2𝑋 2 – 𝑋𝑌 + 180𝑌 − 4𝑌 2 + 𝜆(𝑋 + 𝑌 − 30)
𝜕𝑍
= 100 − 4𝑋 − 𝑌 + 𝜆 = 0 (5.12)
𝜕𝑋
𝜕𝑍
= −𝑋 + 180 − 8𝑌 + 𝜆 = 0 (5.13)
𝜕𝑌
𝜕𝑍
= 𝑋 + 𝑌 − 30 = 0 (5.14)
𝜕𝜆

Solving for X and Y in equations (5.12) and (5.13), and in the above simultaneous equation system,
you obtain the values of X, Y, and that maximise the objective function in equation (5.1). Using the
necessary technique of solving simultaneous equation systems, you obtain the solutions: 𝑋 = 13
𝑋 = 17

The value of 𝜆 can be obtained by substituting for X and Y into either of the equations (5.12) or
(5.13), therefore
𝜆 = 31.

The value of implies that if output is increased by 1 unit, that is, from
30 to 31 units, profit will increase by about N31, and if output is decreased from 30 to 29 units,
profit will decrease by about N31.

ii. Constrained Cost Minimisation


Suppose a firm has to supply a combined order of 500 units of products X and Y. The joint cost
function for the two products is given by:
𝐶 = 100𝑋 2 + 150𝑌 2
Since the quantities to be produced of X and Y are not specified in the order, the firm is free to supply
X and Y in any combination. The problem is therefore, to find the combination of X and Y that
minimises cost of production, subject to the constraint, 𝑋 + 𝑌 = 500.
Thus, we are required to:
Minimise 𝐶 = 100𝑋 2 + 150𝑌 2 (5.15)
Subject to
𝑋 + 𝑌 = 500 (5.16)
The Lagrangian function can be formulated as in equation (5.17) below:
𝑍𝐶 = 100𝑋 2 + 150𝑌 2 + 𝜆(500 − 𝑋 − 𝑌) (5.17)
𝜕𝑍𝐶
= 200𝑋 − 𝜆 = 0 (5.18)
𝜕𝑋
𝜕𝑍𝐶
= 300𝑋 − 𝜆 = 0 (5.19)
𝜕𝑌
𝜕𝑍𝐶
= 500 − 𝑋 − 𝑌 = 0 (5.20)
𝜕𝜆

Again, solving the above simultaneous equations for X, Y, and 𝜆, we get the solution to the cost
minimisation problem.
For simplicity, substract equation (5.19) from equation (5.18), youget:
200𝑋 − 𝜆 – (300𝑌 − 𝜆) = 0
200𝑋 = 300𝑌
𝑋 = 1.5𝑌 (5.21)
Substituting 1.5Y for X in equation (5.20), we get:
500 − 1.5𝑌 − 𝑌 = 0
500 = 2.5𝑌
𝑌 = 200
Substituting Y = 200 into the constraint equation (5.21), you get:
𝑋 + 200 = 500
𝑋 = 300

It follows that the solution to the minimisation problem is that X = 300 and Y = 200 will minimise the
cost of producing the combined 500 units of the products X and Y.
The minimum cost is obtained by using the objective function in equation (5.15) as follows:
𝐶 = 100𝑋 2 + 150𝑌 2
= 100(300)2 + 150(200)2
= 9,000,000 + 6,000,000
= 15,000,000

Thus the minimum cost of supplying the combined 500 units of products X and Y is N15 million.

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercises 1


What is the major difference between constrained profit maximisation problem and constrained cost
minimisation problems?

Self-Assessment Exercises 2
Suppose that the manager of a firm is planning to meet an order of 1000 units of two products X and
Y. The manager’s problem is to find the combination of two goods that minimise its cost. He has the
firm’s cost function of two goods estimated as:
𝐶 = 5𝑋 2 + 20 − 𝑌 2
By using the lagrangian multiplier method, find the quantity of X and quantity of Y, subject to
𝑋 + 𝑌 = 100
that minimise the cost of meeting the order.

5.0 Conclusion
This unit has presented the basic principles of constrained optimisation, with special emphasis on
profit maximisation and cost minimisation. Among the various techniques of constrained
optimisation, the ones that are used most of the time are: (i) the substitution method; and, (ii) the
Lagrangian multiplier method.
.
6.0 Summary
The techniques used to optimise the business objective(s) under constraints are referred to as
constrained optimisation techniques. The three common techniques of optimisation include: (i) Linear
Programming, (ii) constrained optimisation by substitution, and (iii) Lagrangian multiplier. The linear
programming technique has a wide range of applications and should be a subject in itself, usually
discussed in detail under quantitative techniques in economics. This unit has attempted to outline
the two other important techniques, that is, constrained optimisation by substitution and
Lagrangian multiplier. Both techniques were illustrated by profit maximisation and cost
minimisation problems. Under the Langrangian method, a very important multiplier, the
Langrangian multiplier, λ, was introduced. The value of λ would imply that if a business firm
increases output by 1 unit, all things being equal, profit will increase by N1, and vice versa.

7.0 References/Further Readings


Allen, R. G. D. (1956). Mathematical Analysis for Economists, Macmillan, London.
Baumol, W. J. (1977). Economic Theory and Operations Analysis, Englewood Cliffe, N. J. 4th Edn.
Chiang, A. C. (1984). Fundamental Methods Mathematical Economists, 3rd Edition. McGraw-Hill,
NewYork.
Dwivedi, D. N. (2002). Managerial Economics, sixth edition (New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House
Ltd).
Haessuler, E. F. & Paul, R. S. (1976), Introductory Mathematical Analysis for Students of Business
and Economics, 2nd edition (Reston Virginia: Reston Publishing Company).

Self-Assessment Exercises 1 Answer


The major difference between constrained profit maximisation problem and constrained cost
minimisation problems is that constrained profit maximisation problem maximises the profit function
subject to the constraint equation while the constrained cost minimization minimizes the cost function
subject to the constraint equation.
Self-Assessment Exercises 2 Answer
𝐶 = 5𝑋 2 + 20 + 𝑌 2
Subject 𝑥 + 𝑦 = 100
Using Lagrangian Multiplier
𝑋 + 𝑌 = 100
0 = 100 − 𝑋 − 𝑌
𝑍 = 5𝑋 2 + 20 + 𝑌 2 + 𝜆(100 − 𝑋 − 𝑌)
Diff wrt to X, Y and 𝜆
𝛿𝑍
= 10𝑋 − 𝜆 =
𝛿𝑋

0………………………………………………………………………………………1
𝛿𝑍
= 2𝑌 − 𝜆 =
𝛿𝑌

0…………………………………………………………………………………………2
𝛿𝑍
= 100 − 𝑋 − 𝑌 = 0…………………………………………………………………………………3
𝛿𝜆

Subtract equation 2 from 1


10𝑋 − 𝜆 − (2𝑌 − 𝜆) = 0
100 − 𝜆 − 2𝑌 − 𝜆 = 0
10𝑋 − 2𝑌 = 0
10𝑋 = 2𝑌
𝑌 = 5𝑋
Substitute Y into equation 3
100 − 𝑋 − 𝑌 = 0
100 − 𝑋 − 5𝑋 = 0
100 − 6𝑋 = 0
100 = 6𝑋
100
𝑋= 6

𝑋 = 16.7
𝑌 = 5𝑋
𝑌 = 5(16.7)
𝑌 = 83.5
Cost is:
𝐶 = 5𝑋 2 + 20 + 𝑌 2
𝐶 = 5(16.6)2 + 20 + (83.5)2
𝐶 = 1394.45 + 20 + 6972.25
𝐶 = 8386.7
Module 2: Decision Analysis Process

This module examines decision analysis process which is the modern approach to decision making
both in economics and in business. It is made up 2 units and discusses decision analysis and expected
monetary value decisions, decision- making involving sample information, and time perspective in
business decisions.

Unit 1: Decision Analysis


Unit 2: Expected Monetary Value Decisions, Decision- Making Involving Sample
Information, and Time Perspective in Business Decisions

UNIT 1: DECISION ANALYSIS


Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Decision Analysis
3.1 Certainty and Uncertainty in Decision Analysis
3.2 Analysis of the Decision Problem
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
Decision analysis is the modern approach to decision making both in economics and in business. It
can be defined as the logical and quantitative analysis of all the factors influencing a decision. The
analysis forces decision makers to assume some active roles in the decision-making process. By so
doing, they rely more on rules that are consistent with their logic and personal behaviour than on the
mechanical use of a set of formulas and tabulated probabilities.
The primary aim of decision analysis is to increase the likelihood of good outcomes by making
good and effective decisions. A good decision must be consistent with the information and
preferences of the decision maker. It follows that decision analysis provides decision- making
framework based on available information on the business environment, be it sample information,
judgmental information, or a combination of both.

As you may have noticed in module 1, unit 5, optimisation techniques are regarded as the most
important techniques in the managerial decision-making processes. An optimisation technique is
generally defined as the technique used in finding the value of the independent variable(s) that
maximises or minimises the value of the dependent variable.

2.0 Learning Outcomes


At the end of this unit, you will be able to:
i. Understand what decision analysis is all about
ii. Know how you can make business decisions under conditions of uncertainty
iii. Analyse decision problems with a view to providing solutions.
iv. Use sample information in making business and economicdecisions
v. Be informed about time perspective in business decisions.

3.0 Decision Analysis


Most decision-making situations involve the choice of one among several alternatives actions. The
alternative actions and their corresponding payoffs are usually known to the decision-maker in
advance. A prospective investor choosing one investment from several alternative investment
opportunities, a store owner determining how many of a certain type of commodity to stock, and a
company executive making capital-budgeting decisions are some examples of a business decision
maker selecting from a multitude of a multitude of alternatives. The decision maker however, does
not know which alternative which alternative will be best in each case, unless he/she also knows with
certainty the values of the economic variables that affect profit. These economic variables are referred
to, in decision analysis, as states of nature as they represent different events that may occur, over
which the decision maker has no control.

The states of nature in decision problems are generally denoted by si (i = 1, 2, 3, …, k), where k is the
number of or different states of nature in a given business and economic environment. It is assumed
here that the states of nature are mutually exclusive, so that no two states can be in effect at the same
time, and collectively exhaustive, so that all possible states are included within the decision analysis.

The alternatives available to the decision maker are denoted by ai (i = 1, 2, 3, …, n), where n is the
number of available alternatives. It is also generally assumed that the alternatives constitute a
mutually exclusive, collectively exhaustive set.

3.1 Certainty and Uncertainty in Decision Analysis


When the state if nature, si, whether known or unknown, has no influence on the outcomes of given
alternatives, we say that the decision maker is operating under certainty. Otherwise, he/she is
operating under uncertainty.

Decision making under certainty appears to be simpler than that under uncertainty. Under certainty,
the decision maker simply appraises the outcome of each alternative and selects the one that best
meets his/her objective. If the number of alternatives is very high however, even in the absence of
uncertainty, the best alternative may be difficult to identify. Consider, for example, the problem of a
delivery agent who must make 100 deliveries to different residences scattered over Lagos metropolis.
There may literally be thousands of different alternative routes the agent could choose. However, if
the agent had only 3 stops to make, he/she could easily find the least-cost route.

Decision making under uncertainty is always complicated. It is the probability theory and
mathematical expectations that offer tools for establishing logical procedures for selecting the best
decision alternatives. Though statistics provides the structure for reaching the decision, the decision
maker has to inject his/her intuition and knowledge of the problem into the decision-making
framework to arrive at the decision that is both theoretically justifiable and intuitively appealing. A
good theoretical framework and commonsense approach are both essential ingredients for decision
making under uncertainty.

To understand these concepts, consider an investor wishing to invest N100,000 in one of three
possible investment alternatives, A, B, and C. Investment A is a Savings Plan with returns of 6
percent annual interest. Investment B is a government bond with 4.5 percent annual interest.
Investments A and B involve no risks. Investment C consists of shares of mutual fund with a wide
diversity of available holdings from the securities market. The annual return from an investment in C
depends on the uncertain behaviour of the mutual fund under varying economic conditions.

The investors available actions (ai; i = 1, 2, 3, 4) are as follows


a1: Do not invest
a2: Select investment A the 6% bank savings plan.
a3: Select investment B, the 4.5 % government bond. a4: Select investment C, the uncertain mutual
fund.

Observe that actions a1 to a3 do not involve uncertainty as the outcomes associated with them do not
depend on uncertain market conditions. Observe also that action a2 dominates actions a1 and a3. In
addition, action a1 is clearly inferior to the risk-free positive growth investment alternatives a2 and a3
as it provides for no growth of the principal amount.

Action a4 is associated with an uncertain outcome that, depending on the state of the economy,
may produce either a negative return or a positive return. Thus there exists no apparent dominance
relationship between action a4 and action a2, the best among the actions involvingno uncertainty.

Suppose the investor believes that if the market is down in the next year, an investment in the mutual
fund would lose 10 percent returns; if the market stays the same, the investment would stay the same;
and if the market is up, the investment would gain 20 percent returns. The investor has thus defined
the states of nature for his/her investment decision- making problem as follows:

s1: The market is down.


s2: The market remains unchanged.
s3: The market is up.
A study of the market combined with economic expectations for the coming year may lead the
investor to attach subjective probabilities of 0.25, 0.25, and 0.50, respectively, the the states of
nature, s1, s2, and s3. The major question is then, how can the investor use the foregoing information
regarding investments A, B, and C, and the expected market behaviour serves as an aid in selecting
the investment that best satisfieshis/her objectives? This question will be considered in the sections
thatfollow.

3.2 Analysis of the Decision Problem


In problems involving choices from many alternatives, one must identify all the actions that may be
taken and all the states of nature whoseoccurrence may influence decisions. The action to take none of
the listed alternatives whose outcome is known with certainty may also be included in the list of
actions. Associated with each action is a list of payoffs. If an action does not involve risk, the
payoff will be the sameno matter which state of nature occurs.

The payoffs associated with each possible outcome in a decision problem should be listed in a
payoff table, defined as a listing, in tabular form, of the value payoffs associated with all possible
actions underevery state of nature in a decision problem. The payoff table is usually displayed in grid
form, with the states of nature indicated in the columns and the actions in the rows. If the actions
are labeled a1, a2, …, an, and the states of nature labeled s1, s2,…, sk, a payoff table for a decision
problem appears as in table 1.1 below. Note that a payoff is entered in each of the nk cells of the
payoff table, one for the payoff associatedwith each action under every possible state of nature.

Table 1.1: The Payoff Table


Example
The managing director of a large manufacturing company is considering three potential locations as
sites at which to build a subsidiary plant. To decide which location to select for the subsidiary plant,
the managing director will determine the degree to which each location satisfies the company’s
objectives of minimising transportation costs, minimising the effect of local taxation, and having
access to an ample pool of available semi-skilled workers. Construct a payoff table and payoff
measures that effectively rank each potential location according to the degree to which each satisfies
the company’s objectives.

Solution
Let the three potential locations be sites A, B, and C. To determine a payoff measure to associate with
each of the company’s objectives under each alternative, the managing director subjectively
assigns a rating on a 0 – to – 10 scale to measure the degree to which each location satisfies the
company’s objectives. For each objective, a 0 rating indicates complete dissatisfaction, while a 10
rating indicates complete dissatisfaction. The results are presented in table 1.2.

Table 1.2: Rating for Three Alternatives Plant Sites for a Manufacturing Company

To combine the components of payoff, the managing director asks himself, what are the relative
measures of importance of the three company objectives I have considered as components of
payoff? Suppose the managing director decides that minimising transportation costs is most
important and twice as important as either the minimization of local taxation or the size of
workforce available. He/she thus assigns a weight of 2 to the transportation costs and weights of 1
each to taxation costs and workforce. This will give rise to the following payoff measures:

Payoff (Site A) = 6(2) + 6(1) + 7(1) = 25


Payoff (Site B) = 4(2) + 9(1) + 6(1) = 23
Payoff (Site C) = 10(2) + 5(1) + 4(1) = 29
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise 1
Discuss how decision-making situations involve the choice of one among several alternatives
actions.

Self-Assessment Exercise 2
Differentiate between Certainty and Uncertainty in Decision Analysis

5.0 Conclusion
This unit focuses on business decision analysis. The idea is that the most plausible way of making
business decisions is to look at and analyse business opportunities, variables, and challenges. To help
you carry out these important tasks, the unit presents important discussions on:
1. Certainty and uncertainty in decision analysis
2. Analysis of decision problems

6.0 Summary
This unit informs you that most decision-making situations involve the choice of one among several
alternatives actions. The alternative actions and their corresponding payoffs are usually known to the
decision-maker in advance. When the state if nature, si, whether known or unknown, has no
influence on the outcomes of given alternatives, you will say that the decision maker is operating
under certainty. Otherwise, he/she is operating under uncertainty. Decision making under certainty
appears to be simpler than that under uncertainty. Under certainty, the decision maker simply
appraises the outcome of each alternative and selects theone that best meets his/her objective.

In problems involving choices from many alternatives, one must identify all the actions that may be
taken and all the states of nature whose occurrence may influence decisions. The action to take none
of the listed alternatives whose outcome is known with certainty may also be included in the list of
actions. Associated with each action is a list of payoffs. If an action does not involve risk, the
payoff will be the sameno matter which state of nature occurs.

7.0 References/Further Readings


Armstrong, J. S. (2001). Role playing: a method to forecast decisions. In Armstrong, Jon Scott
(ed.). Principles of forecasting: a handbook for researchers and practitioners. International
series in operations research & management science. Vol. 30. Boston, MA: Kluwer Academic
Publishers. pp. 15–30. CiteSeerX 10.1.1.464.5677. doi:10.1007/978-0-306-47630-
3_2. ISBN 978-0792379300
Baumol, W. J. (1977). Economic Theory and Operations Analysis, Englewood Cliffe, N. J. 4th
Edition.
Brockmann, E., & Anthony, W. (2002). Tacit knowledge and strategic decision making. Group &
Organization Management, 27 (4): 436–
455. doi:10.1177/1059601102238356. S2CID 145110719
Chiang, A. C. (1984). Fundamental Methods Mathematical Economists, 3rd Edition. McGraw-Hill,
NewYork.
Dwivedi, D. N. (2002). Managerial Economics, sixth edition (New Delhi: Vikas Publishing
House Ltd).
Haessuler, E. F., & Paul, R. S. (1976), Introductory Mathematical Analysis for Students of Business
and Economics, 2nd edition (Reston Virginia: Reston Publishing Company).
Herbert, A. S. (1977). The New Science of Management Decision. Prentice-
Hall. ISBN 9780136161448.
Klein, G. (2008). Naturalistic Decision Making. Human Factors: The Journal of the Human Factors
and Ergonomics Society, 50 (3), 456–460.
Monahan, G. E. (2000). Management decision making: spreadsheet modeling, analysis, and
application. Cambridge, UK; New York: Cambridge University Press.

Self-Assessment Exercise 1 Answer


Decision-making involves making choices among several alternatives actions. The alternative actions
and their corresponding payoffs are usually known to the decision-maker in advance. A prospective
investor choosing one investment from several alternative investment opportunities, a store owner
determining how many of a certain type of commodity to stock, and a company executive making
capital-budgeting decisions are some examples of a business decision maker selecting from a
multitude of a multitude of alternatives. The decision maker however, does not know which
alternative which alternative will be best in each case, unless he/she also knows with certainty the
values of the economic variables that affect profit. These economic variables are referred to, in
decision analysis, as states of nature as they represent different events that may occur, over which
the decision maker has no control.

The states of nature in decision problems are generally denoted by si (i = 1, 2, 3, …, k), where k is the
number of or different states of nature in a given business and economic environment. It is assumed
here that the states of nature are mutually exclusive, so that no two states can be in effect at the same
time, and collectively exhaustive, so that all possible states are included within the decision analysis.
The alternatives available to the decision maker are denoted by ai (i = 1, 2, 3, …, n), where n is the
number of available alternatives. It is also generally assumed that the alternatives constitute a
mutually exclusive, collectively exhaustive set.

Self-Assessment Exercise 2 Answer


Decision making under certainty appears to be simpler than that under uncertainty. Under certainty,
the decision maker simply appraises the outcome of each alternative and selects the one that best
meets his/her objective. If the number of alternatives is very high however, even in the absence of
uncertainty, the best alternative may be difficult to identify. Consider, for example, the problem of a
delivery agent who must make 100 deliveries to different residences scattered over Lagos metropolis.
There may literally be thousands of different alternative routes the agent could choose. However, if
the agent had only 3 stops to make, he/she could easily find the least-cost route.

Decision making under uncertainty is always complicated. It is the probability theory and
mathematical expectations that offer tools for establishing logical procedures for selecting the best
decision alternatives. Though statistics provides the structure for reaching the decision, the decision
maker has to inject his/her intuition and knowledge of the problem into the decision-making
framework to arrive at the decision that is both theoretically justifiable and intuitively appealing. A
good theoretical framework and commonsense approach are both essential ingredients for decision
making under uncertainty.
UNIT 2: EXPECTED MONETARY VALUE DECISIONS, DECISION- MAKING
INVOLVING SAMPLE INFORMATION, AND TIME PERSPECTIVE IN BUSINESS
DECISIONS

Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Important Features of Business Decision-Making Processes
3.1 Expected Monetary Value Decisions
3.2 Decision Making Involving Sample Information
3.3 Time Perspective in Business Decisions
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
As you noted in unit 1 of this module, decision analysis provides you with decision- making
framework based on available information on the business environment, in the form of either sample
information or judgment information or both. In this unit, we examine the important features of
business decision making as they relate to expected monetary values, availability of sample
information, and time perspective.

2.0 Learning Outcomes


Having gone through this unit, you will be able to:
i. Have additional leverage in decision making processes
ii. Be informed on how to make expected monetary value decisions
iii. Use sample information in profitable business decisions
iv. Understand and take into consideration time perspectives inbusiness planning.
3.0 Important Features of Business Decision-Making Processes
3.1 Expected Monetary Value Decisions
A decision-making procedure, which employs both the payoff table and prior probabilities associated
with the states of nature to arrive at a decision is referred to as the Expected Monetary Value
decision procedure. Note that by prior probability we mean probabilities representing the chances of
occurrence of the identifiable states of nature in a decision problem prior to gathering any sample
information. The expected monetary value decision refers to the selection of available action based on
either the expected opportunity loss or the expectedprofit of the action.

Decision makers are generally interested in the optimal monetary value decisions. The optimal
expected monetary value decision involves the selection of the action associated with the minimum
expected opportunity loss or the action associated with the maximum expected profit, depending on
the objective of the decision maker.

The concept of expected monetary value applies mathematical expectation, where opportunity loss or
profit is the random variable and the prior probabilities represent the probability distribution
associatedwith the random variable.

The expected opportunity loss is computed by:


𝐸(𝐿𝑖 = ∑ 𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑗 𝐿𝑖𝑗 𝑃(𝑠𝑗), (𝑖 = 1, 2, … , 𝑛) (2.1)
where 𝐿𝑖𝑗 is the opportunity loss for selecting action ai given that the state of nature, sj, occurs
and 𝑃(𝑠𝑗) is the prior probability assigned to the state of nature, sj.

The expected profit for each action is computed in a similar way:


𝐸(𝜋𝑖 ) = ∑ 𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑗 𝜋𝑖𝑗 𝑃(𝑠𝑗) (2.2)
Where 𝜋𝑖𝑗 represents profits for selecting action ai

Example
By recording the daily demand for a perishable commodity over a period of time, a retailer was able
to construct the following probability distribution for the daily demand levels:

Table 2.1: Probability Distribution for the Daily Demand

The opportunity loss table for this demand-inventory situation is as follows:

Table 2.2: The Opportunity Loss

We are required to find the inventory level that minimizes the expected opportunity loss

Solution
Given the prior probabilities in the first table, the expected opportunity loss is computed as follows:
𝐸(𝐿𝑖 ) = ∑ 𝑗 = 3𝐿𝑖𝑗 𝑃(𝑠), for each inventory level, 𝑖 = 1, 2, . . 𝑛. (2.3)
The expected opportunity losses at each inventory level become:
E(L1) = 0(0.5) + 3(0.3) + 6(0.2) = N2.10
E(L2) = 2(0.5) + 0(0.3) + 3(0.2) = N1.60
E(L3) = 4(0.5) + 2(0.3) + 0(0.2) = N2.60

It follows that in order to minimize the expected opportunity loss, the retailer should stock 2 units of
the perishable commodity. This is the optimal decision.

3.2 Decision Making Involving Sample Information


In discussing prior probabilities, recall it was noted that prior probabilities are acquired either by
subjective selection or by computation from historical data. No current information describing the
probability of occurrence of the states of nature was assumed to be available.
In many cases, observational information or other evidence are available to the decision maker either
for purchase or at the cost of experimentation. For example, a retailer whose business depends on the
weather may consult a meteorologist before making decisions, or an investor may hire a market
consultant before investing. Market surveys carried out before the release of a new product represent
another area in which the decision maker may seek additional information. In each of these examples,
the decision maker attempts to acquire information relative to the occurrence of the states of nature
from a source other than that from which the prior probabilities were computed.

When such information are available, Baye’s Law can be employed to revise the prior probabilities to
reflect the new information. These revised probabilities are referred to as posterior probabilities.

By definition, the posterior probability represented symbolically by P(sk/x) is the probability of


occurrence of the state of nature sk, given the sample information, x. This probability is computed
by:
P(s k/x) = P(x/sk)P(sk)
∑all iP(x/si)P(si) (2.4)
The probabilities, P(x/si) are the conditional probabilities of observing the observational
information, x, under the states of nature, si, and the probabilities P(si) are the prior probabilities.

The expected monetary value decisions are formulated in the same way as before, except that the
posterior probabilities are used instead of prior probabilities. If the objective is to minimize the
expected opportunity loss, the quantity is computed for each action ai. The expected opportunity loss
in this case is computed by:
𝐸(𝐿𝑖 = ∑ 𝑎𝑙𝑙𝑖 𝐿𝑖𝑗 𝑃(𝑠𝑖⁄𝑥 ), (𝑖 = 1, 2, … , 𝑛) (2.5)

Example
It is known that an assembly machine operates at a 5 percent or 10 percent defective rate. When
running at a 10 percent defective rate, the machine is said to be out of control. It is then shut down
and readjusted. From past experience, the machine is known to run at 5 percent defective rate 90
percent of the time. A sample of size n = 20 has been selected from the output of the machine, and y
=2 defectives have been observed. Based on both the prior and sample information, what is the
probability that the assembly machine is in control (running at 5 percent defective rate)?

Solution
The states of nature in this example relates to the assembly machine defective rates. Thus the states of
nature include:
s1 = 0.05, and s2 = 0.10 with the assumed prior probabilities of occurrence of 0.90 and 0.10. We are
required to use these prior probabilities, in line with the observed sample information, to find the
posterior probability associated with the state of nature, s1.
In this problem, the “experimental information, x” is the observation of y = 2 defectives from a
sample of n = 20 items selected from the output of the assembly machine. We need to find the
probability that the experimental information, x, could arise under each state of nature, si. This can be
done by referring to the binomial probability distribution.

Under the state of nature s1 = 0.05, we obtain:


P(x/0.05) = P(n = 20, y =2/0.05) = 0.925 – 0.736 = 0.189 (from the
binomial distribution table)
Under the state of nature, s2 = 0.10, we obtain:
P(x/0.10) = P(n = 20, y = 2/0.10) = 0.677 – 0.392 = 0.285 (from the
binomial distribution table).

We now employ the Baye’s Law to find the posterior probability that the machine is in control (s1)
based on both the prior and experimental information. To make the work easy, we use the Columnar
approach to the use of Baye’s Law as illustrated below:

Table 2.3: Columnar approach to Use of Baye’s Law


1. Prior,
2. Experimental
3. Product,
4. Posteri or,

Looking at column (4), we observe the product of the entries in columns


(2) and (3). These values measure the joint probabilities. The sum of the entries in column (4) is the
term in the denominator of the formula for Baye’s Law and measures the marginal probability of
observing the experimental information, x. The posterior probabilities, column (5), are obtained by
taking each entry in column (4) and dividing by the sum of the entries in column (4).

Even though we found that 10 percent of the items in the sample is defective (that is, 2 out of the 20
items is defective), the posterior probability that the machine is running at the 10 percent defective
rate (running out of control) is only 0.14, which is a little greater than the prior probability that the
machine is out of control (0.10). It follows that the probability that the machine is not running out
of control is 0.86.

3.3 Time Perspective in Business Decisions


All business decisions are taken with some time perspective. Time perspective refers to the duration
of time period extending from the relevant past to foreseeable future, taken into consideration while
making a business decision. The relevant past refers to the period of past experience and trends which
are relevant for business decisions with long-run implications. Bear in mind that all business
decisions do not have the same time perspective. Some have short- run repercussions, and
therefore, involve short-run perspective. For instance, a decision regarding building inventories of
finished product involves a short-run time perspective.

There are many business decisions which have long-run repercussions such as, investment in land,
building, machinery, expansion of the scale of production, introduction of a new product, investment
abroad, and the like. Decisions on such business issues may not be profitable in the short-run, but
may prove very profitable in the long-run.
Business decisions makers must therefore, assess and determine the time perspective of business
propositions well in advance and make decisions accordingly. Determination of time perspective is
very significant, especially where forecasting, planning, and projections are involved. Decision-
makers must decide on an appropriate future period for projecting the value of a given business
variable. Otherwise, projections may prove meaningless from business analysis point of view and
decisions based thereon may result in poor pay-offs. For instance, in a business decision regarding
the establishment of an institute of entrepreneurship, projecting a short-run demand and taking a
short-run time perspective will not be wise.

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercises 1


Give the justification for using an expected monetary value objective in decision problems.

Self-Assessment Exercises 2
What is the major difference between expected monetary value objective in decision problems and
decision making involving sample information?

5.0 Conclusion
To beef up your understanding of business decision-making processes, this unit has examined the
important features of decision making in business, including:
1. Expected monetary value decisions
2. Decisions involving sample information
3. Time perspective in business decisions

6.0 Summary
Decision makers are generally interested in the optimal monetary value decisions. The optimal
expected monetary value decision involves the selection of the action associated with the minimum
expected opportunity loss or the action associated with the maximum expected profit, depending on
the objective of the decision maker.

All business decisions are taken with some time perspective. Time perspective refers to the duration
of time period extending from the relevant past to foreseeable future, taken into consideration while
making a business decision. The relevant past refers to the period of past experience and trends which
are relevant for business decisions withlong-run implications.

7.0 References/Further Readings


Armstrong, J. S. (2001). Role playing: a method to forecast decisions. In Armstrong, Jon Scott
(ed.). Principles of forecasting: a handbook for researchers and practitioners. International
series in operations research & management science. Vol. 30. Boston, MA: Kluwer Academic
Publishers. pp. 15–30. CiteSeerX 10.1.1.464.5677. doi:10.1007/978-0-306-47630-
3_2. ISBN 978-0792379300
Baumol, W. J. (1977). Economic Theory and Operations Analysis, Englewood Cliffe, N. J. 4th Edn.
Brockmann, E., & Anthony, W. (2002). Tacit knowledge and strategic decision making. Group &
Organization Management. 27 (4): 436–
455. doi:10.1177/1059601102238356. S2CID 145110719
Chiang, A. C. (1984). Fundamental Methods Mathematical Economists, 3rd Edition. McGraw-Hill,
NewYork.
Dwivedi, D. N. (2002). Managerial Economics, sixth edition (New Delhi: Vikas Publishing
House Ltd).
Haessuler, E. F., & Paul, R. S. (1976). Introductory Mathematical Analysis for Students of Business
and Economics, 2nd edition (Reston Virginia: Reston Publishing Company).
Herbert, A. S. (1977). The New Science of Management Decision. Prentice-
Hall. ISBN 9780136161448.
Klein, G. (2008). Naturalistic Decision Making. Human Factors: The Journal of the Human Factors
and Ergonomics Society. 50 (3): 456–460.
Monahan, G. E. (2000). Management decision making: spreadsheet modeling, analysis, and
application. Cambridge, UK; New York: Cambridge University Press.
Self-Assessment Exercises 1 Answer
Decision makers are generally interested in the optimal monetary value decisions. The optimal
expected monetary value decision involves the selection of the action associated with the minimum
expected opportunity loss or the action associated with the maximum expected profit, depending on
the objective of the decision maker.

The concept of expected monetary value applies mathematical expectation, where opportunity loss or
profit is the random variable and the prior probabilities represent the probability distribution
associatedwith the random variable.

Self-Assessment Exercises 2 Answer


A decision-making procedure, which employs both the payoff table and prior probabilities associated
with the states of nature to arrive at a decision is referred to as the Expected Monetary Value
decision procedure. Note that by prior probability we mean probabilities representing the chances of
occurrence of the identifiable states of nature in a decision problem prior to gathering any sample
information. The expected monetary value decision refers to the selection of available action based on
either the expected opportunity loss or the expectedprofit of the action.

Decision makers are generally interested in the optimal monetary value decisions. The optimal
expected monetary value decision involves the selection of the action associated with the minimum
expected opportunity loss or the action associated with the maximum expected profit, depending on
the objective of the decision maker.
Module 3: Analysis of Market Demand, Demand
Functions and Demand Forecasting

This module discusses an important aspect of Economics consists of 5 units and are: analysis of
market demand; demand functions, elasticity of demand; price elasticity, revenues and income
elasticity of demand and demand forecasting.

Unit 1: Analysis of Market Demand


Unit 2: Demand Functions
Unit 3: Elasticity of Demand
Unit 4: Price Elasticity, Revenues and Income Elasticity of Demand
Unit 5: Demand Forecasting

UNIT 1: ANALYSIS OF MARKET DEMAND


Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Analysis of Market Demand
3.1 Definition of Market Demand
3.2 Types of Demand
3.3 Determinants of Market Demand
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
This unit discusses the meaning of market demand, types of demand, determinants of market demand,
the demand functions, elasticities of demand, and techniques of demand forecasting. This is in
recognition of the fact that the analysis of market demand for a business firm’s product plays an
important role in business decision making. In addition, for a firm to succeed in its operations, it must
plan for future production, the inventories of raw materials, advertisements, and sales outlets. It
follows that the knowledge of the magnitude of the current and future demand is indispensable.

The analysis of market demand enables business executives know:


i. the factors determining the size of consumer demand for theirproducts;
ii. the degree of responsiveness of demand to changes in itsdeterminants;
iii. the possibility of sales promotion through manipulation of prices;
iv. responsiveness of demand to advertisement expenditures; and,
v. optimum levels of sales, inventories, and advertisementexpenditures.

2.0 Learning Outcomes


At the end of this unit, you should be able to:
i. Know what the market demand is all about
ii. Understand the various types of demand
iii. Be familiar with the determinants of demand

3.0 Analysis of Market Demand


3.1 Definition of Market Demand
The market demand of any product is the sum of individual demands for the product at a given market
price in a given time period. Note that the individual demand for the product per unit of time at a
given price is the quantity demanded by an individual.

A horizontal summation of individual demand schedule gives rise to the market demand schedule. For
example, assume three consumers, X, Y, and Z of a given commodity, say commodity A. Let the
individual demands by the consumers, X, Y, and Z be represented as in table 1.1 below, the market
demand schedule, that is, the aggregate of individual demands by the three consumers at different
prices, as indicated, is shown by the last column of the table.

Table 1.1: The Market Demand Schedule


Price Quantity Demanded Market
of A for Commodity A Demand
X Y Z
10 5 1 0 6
8 7 2 0 9
6 10 4 1 15
4 14 6 2 22
2 20 10 4 34
0 27 15 8 50

Figure 1.1 Derivation of Market Demand Curve

The demand schedules of X, Y and Z are plotted as 𝐷𝒂 , 𝐷𝒃 and 𝐷𝒄 in fig. 3.1. Horizontal summation
of these individual demand curves gives the market demand curve as shown by 𝐷𝒎 . The market
demand curve can also be obtained by plotting the total demand given in the last column against the
corresponding price in the first column. Graphically, market demand curve is horizontal summation of
individual demand curves. The graphical derivation of the market demand curve through the
horizontal summation of the individual curves is illustrated in figure 1.1.

3.2 Types of Demand


The major types of demand encountered in business decisions are outlined below.
i. Individual and Market Demand
The quantity of a commodity an individual is willing and able to purchase at a particular price,
during a specific time period, given his/her money income, his/her taste, and prices of other
commodities, such as substitutes and complements, is referred to as the individual demand for
the commodity. As illustrated in table 8.1 above, the total quantity which all the consumers of the
commodity are willing and able to purchase at a given price per time unit, given their money incomes,
their tastes, and prices of other commodities, is referred to as the market demand for the commodity.

ii. Demand for firm’s and Industry’s Product


The quantity of a firm’s product that can be sold at a given price over time is known as the
demand for the firm’s product. The sum of demand for the products of all firms in the industry is
referred to as the market demand or industry demand for the product.

iii. Autonomous and Derived Demand


An autonomous demand or direct demand for a commodity is one that arises on its own out of a
natural desire to consume or possess a commodity. This type of demand is independent of the demand
for other commodities. Autonomous demand may also arise due to demonstration effect of a rise in
income, increase in population, and advertisement of new products.

The demand for a commodity which arises from the demand for other commodities, called ‘parent
products’ is called derived demand. Demand for land, fertilizers and agricultural tools, is a derived
demand because these commodities are demanded due to demand for food. In addition, demand for
bricks, cement, and the like are derived demand from the demand for house and other types of
buildings. In general, demand for producer goods or industrial inputs are a deriveddemand.

iv. Demand for Durable and Non-Durable Goods


Durable goods are those goods for which the total utility or usefulness is not exhaustible in the short-
run use. Such goods can be used repeatedly over a period of time. Durable consumer goods include
houses, clothing, shoes, furniture, refrigerator, and the like. Durable producer goods include mainly
the items under ‘fixed assets’, such as building, plant, machinery, and office furniture.

The demand for durable goods changes over a relatively longer period than that of the non-durable
goods. The demand for non-durable goods depends largely on their current prices, consumers’
income, and fashion.It is also subject to frequent changes. Durable goods create replacement demand,
while non-durable goods do not. In addition, the demand for non-durable goods change linearly,
while the demand the demand for durable goods change exponentially as the stock of durable goods
changes.

v. Short-term and Long-term Demand


Short-term demand refers to the demand for goods over a short period. The type of goods involved
in the short-term demand are most fashion consumer goods, goods used seasonally, inferior
substitutes for superior goods during scarcities. Short- term demand depends mainly on the
commodity price, price of their substitutes, current disposable income of the consumers, the
consumers’ ability to adjust their consumption pattern, and their susceptibility to advertisement of
newproducts.

Long-term demand refers to the demand which exists over a long period of time. Changes in long-
term demand occur only after a long period. Most generic goods have long-term demand. The long-
term demand depends on the long-term income trends, availability of better substitutes, sales
promotion, consumer credit facility, and the like.

3.3 Determinants of Market Demand


For corporate managers at large and specifically, the marketing managers, it is highly important to
understand the factors affecting the market demand for their products. This understanding is required
for analysing and estimating demand for the products. Though there are several factors affecting
market demand for a product, the most important are:

i. Price of the product or the own price (Po): This is the most important determinant of demand for
a product. The own price of a product and the quantity demanded of it are inversely-related so that,
∆𝑄0
>0 (1.1)
∆𝑃0

ii. Price of the related goods, such as substitutes and complements (Ps and Pc): When two
goods are substitutes for each other, the changein price of one affects the demand for the other in the
same direction. If goods X and Y are substitute goods, then an increase in the price of X will give
rise to an increase in the demand for Y. Note that changes in the price of related goods cause shifts
in the demand for the goods. Changes in demand are illustrated graphically as rightward shifts (for
increase) and leftward shifts (for decrease) in the demand for the products. As shown below, an
increase in the price of good X will shift the demand for good Y to the right and shift that of good X
to the left.

Shift in Demand

Figure 1.2: Increase in Demand

Figure 1.3: Decrease in Demand

∆𝐷
𝐷𝑿 = 𝑓(𝑃𝑌 ), ∆𝑃𝑋 < 0 (1.2)
𝑌

∆𝐷
𝐷𝒀 = 𝑓(𝑃𝑋 ), ∆𝑃 𝑌 > 0 (1.3)
𝑋
When two goods are complements for each other, one complements the use of another. Petrol and car
a complement goods. If an increase in the price of one good causes a decrease in demand for the
other, the goods are said to be complements. Thus if the demand function for a car (Dc) in relation
to petrol price (Pp) is specified by:
∆𝐷
𝐷𝐶 = 𝑓(𝑃𝑃 ), ∆𝑃 𝐶 < 0 (1.4)
𝑃

iii. Consumer’s Income: This is the major determinant of demand for any product since the
purchasing power of the consumer is determined by the disposable income. Managers need to
know that income-demand relationship is of a more varied nature than those between demand and its
other determinants.

The relationship between demand for commodity X, for example, and the consumer’s income, say
Y, keeping other factors constant, can be expressed by a demand function:
∆𝐷
𝐷𝑿 = 𝑓(𝑌), ∆𝑃𝑋 > 0 (1.5)
𝑌

You should note that consumer goods of different nature have different relationships with income of
different categories of consumers. The manager needs, therefore, to be completely aware of the
goods they deal with and their relationship with consumer’s income, particularly with respect to the
assessment of both existing and prospective demand for a product.

Regarding income-demand analysis, consumer goods and services are grouped under four broad
categories:
a. Essential Consumer Goods (ECG). Goods and services in this category are referred to as ‘basic
needs’, and are consumed by all persons in a society. Such goods and services include food grains,
salt, vegetable oil, cooking, fuel, housing, and minimum clothing. The demand for such goods and
services increase with increases in consumer’s income, but only up to a certain limit, even though the
total expenditure may increase in accordance with the quality of goods consumed, all things being
equal. The relationship between goods and services of this category and consumer’s income is shown
by the curve ECG in figure 1.4 below.
Figure 1.4: Income-Demand Relationships

b. Inferior Goods (IG): Inferior and superior goods are widely known to both buyers and sellers.
Economists define inferior goods as goods in which their demands decrease as consumer’s income
increases, beyond a certain level of income. The relationship between income and demand for an
inferior good is illustrated by curve IG in figure 1.4. Demand for such goods rises only up to a certain
level of income, say (OY1), and declines as income increases beyond this level.
c. Normal Goods (NG): In economic terms, normal goods are goods demanded in increasing
quantities as consumer’s income rises. Examples of normal goods are clothing, furniture, and
automobiles. The type of relationship between income and demand for normal goods is shown by
curve NG in figure 1.4. Note in the figure that up to a certain level of income, say Y1, the relationship
between income and demand for all types of goods is similar. The difference is only in terms of the
degree of relationship. The relationship becomes distinctively different beyond the income level (Y1).
d. Luxury and Prestige Goods: All such goods that add to the pleasure and prestige of the
consumer without enhancing his or her earning fall in the category of luxury goods. Prestige goods
are special category of luxury goods, examples, rare paintings and antiques, prestigious schools, and
the like. Demand for such goods arises beyond a certain level of consumer’s income. Producers of
such goods, while assessing the demand for their product, need to consider the income changes in the
richer section of the society. The income-demand relationship for this category of goods is shown by
curve LG in figure 1.4.
iv. Consumers’ Tastes and Preferences: Consumers’ tastes and preferences play important role in
the determination of the demand for a product. Tastes and preferences generally depend on life
style, social customs, religious values attached to a commodity, habit of the people, age and sex of
the consumers, and the like. Changes in these factors tend to change consumers’ tastes and
preferences.
v. Advertisement Expenditures: Advertisement costs are incurred while attempting to promote
sales. It helps in increasing product demands in at least four ways:
(a) by informing the potential consumers about the product’s availability;
(b) by showing the product’s superiority over the rival product;
(c) by influencing consumer’s choice against the rival product; and,
(d) by setting new fashions and changing tastes. The impact of these causes upward shifts in the
demand for the product. All things being equal, as expenditure on advertisement increases, it is
expected that volume of sales will increase. The relationship between sales (S) and advertisement
outlays (AD) can beexpressed by the function:

Figure 1.5: Advancement and Sale

The relationship as shown by figure 1.5 is based on the followingassumptions:


(a) Consumers are fairly sensitive and responsive to various modes ofadvertisement
(b) The rival firms do not react to the advertisement made by thefirm,
(c) The level of demand has not reached the saturation point and advertisement makes only
marginal impact on demand for a product,
(d) Adding of advertisement cost to the product price does not make the price prohibitive for
consumers, compared to the price of substitutes.
vi. Consumers’ Expectations: The consumers’ expectations about the future product prices, income,
and supply position of goods play significant role in the determination of demand for goods and
services in the short run. A rational consumer who expects a high rise in the price of a nonperishable
commodity would buy more of it at the high current price with a view to avoiding the pinch of the
high price rise in the future. This partly explains the high demand for fuel during periods of expected
increase of pump price of fuel in Nigeria. On the contrary, if a rational consumer expects a fall in the
price of goods he/she purchases, he/she would postpone the purchase of such goods with a view to
taking advantage of lower prices in the future. This is especially the case for non- essential goods.
This behaviour tends to reduce the current demand for goods whose prices are expected to decrease in
the future.

An expected increase in income would similarly increase current demand for goods and services.
For instance, a corporate announcement of bonuses or upward revision of salary scales would induce
increases in current demand for goods and services.
vii. Demonstration Effect: Whenever new commodities or models of commodities are introduced
in the market, many households buy them not because of their genuine need for them but because
their neighbours have purchased them. This type of purchase arises out of such feelings jealousy,
competition, and equality in the peer group, social inferiority, and the desire to raise once social
status. Purchases based on these factors are the result of what economists refer to as ‘demonstration
effect’ or the ‘Band- Wagon effect’. These effects have positive impacts on commodity demand.

On the contrary, when a commodity becomes a thing of common use, some rich people decrease their
consumption of such goods. This behaviour is referred to in economics as the ‘snob effect’. This has
negative impact on the demand for the commodity concerned.
Other determinants of demand for commodities include Consumer- Credit facility, the population of
consumers, and income distribution.

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercises 1


Define demand for a commodity.

Self-Assessment Exercises 2
1. Discuss the reason it is important for a manager to understand the various types of demand.
2. Explain with practical examples the following demand concepts:
i. Autonomous demand
ii. Industry demand

Self-Assessment Exercises 3
1. Discuss the major factors that determine demand for a commodity.
2. Distinguish between change in quantity demanded and change in demand.

6.0 Summary
The market demand of any product is the sum of individual demands for the product at a given market
price in a given time period. The individual demand for the product per unit of time at a given price
is the quantity demanded by an individual.

The quantity of a commodity an individual is willing and able to purchase at a particular price,
during a specific time period, given his/her money income, his/her taste, and prices of other
commodities, such as substitutes and complements, is referred to as the individual demand for the
commodity.

An autonomous demand or direct demand for a commodity is one that arises on its own, out of a
natural desire to consume or possess a commodity. This type of demand is independent of the demand
for other commodities. Autonomous demand may also arise due to demonstration effect of a rise in
income, increase in population, and advertisement of new products.

Durable goods are those goods for which the total utility or usefulness is not exhaustible in the short-
run use. Such goods can be used repeatedly over a period of time. The demand for durable goods
changes over a relatively longer period than that of the non- durable goods.

Consumer goods of different nature have different relationships with income of different categories of
consumers. The manager needs, therefore, to be completely aware of the goods they deal with and
their relationship with consumer’s income, particularly with respect to the assessment of both existing
and prospective demand for a product.

7.0 References/Further Readings


Boulding. K. E. (1966). Economics Analysis: Microeconomics, 4th Edition, New York Harper and
Row.
Browning, E. K. & Browning, J. M. (1989). Microeconomic Theory and Application, Scott, Foresman
& Co., London, 3th Edition.
Dwivedi, D. N. (2002). Managerial Economics, sixth edition (New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House
Ltd).
Ferguson, C. E. (1972). Microeconomic Theory, 3rd Edition, Illnois, Richard D. Irwin, Inc.
Koutsoyiannis, A. (1979). Modern Microeconomics, 2nd edition, Macmillian.
Hirshleifer, J. (1987). Price Theory and Application, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.
Marshall, A. (1920). Principles of Economics, 8th Edition, London, Macmillian & Co.
Samuelson, W., & Marks, S. (2003). Managerial Economics, 4th ed., Wiley.

Self-Assessment Exercise 1 Answer


The demand for a commodity can be define as the quantity of a commodity that which consumers are
willing and able to buy at a given prices during a given period of time.

Self-Assessment Exercise 2 Answer


1. Sales Forecasting: The demand is a basis of the sales of the product of a firm Hence, sales
forecasting can be made on the basis of demand.If demand is high, sales will be high and if demand is
low sales will be low. The firms can make different arrangements to increase or reduce production or
push up sales on the basis of sale forecast.
2. Pricing Decisions: The analysis of demand is the basis of pricing decisions of a firm. If the
demand for the product is high, the firm can charge high price, other things remaining the same. On
the contrary, if the demand is low, the firm cannot charge high price.
The demand analysis also helps the firm in profit budgeting. If demand is high price can be charged
high and profit will be high. Hence, the profit or sales, in part, depend on the demand for a
commodity.
3. Marketing Decisions: The analysis of demand helps a firm to formulate marketing decisions. The
demand analysis analyses and measures the forces determine demand. The demand can be influenced
by manipulating the factors on which consumers base their demands, example, consumers may base
their demand on attractiveness. So good packaging may lead to an increase in demand.
4. Production Decisions: How much a firm can produce depends on its capacity, but ho could
produce depends on demand. Production is not re is no demand. But continuous production schedule
salary if the necessary if the de s than the quantity of production, new y means of promotional
activities such as demand is less demand for the product is relatively stable. If the demand is expected
to be high in future, the firm should hold more inventories. Similarly, the personnel manager must set
up recruitment and training programs to ensure availability of different work force to produce and sell
the products.
5. Financial Decisions: The demand condition in the market for firm's product affects the financial
decisions as well. If the demand for firm's product is strong and growing, the need for additional
finance will be greater. Hence, the financial manager should make necessary arrangement to finance
the growing need of the capital.
6. Investment Policy: Demand analysis helps firm adopt appropriate investment policy. Based on the
nature of demand for a particular product in a particular market, firms can make their investment
decisions.

Self-Assessment Exercises 2 Answer


2. An autonomous demand or direct demand for a commodity is one that arises on its own out of a
natural desire to consume or possess a commodity. This type of demand is independent of the demand
for other commodities. Autonomous demand may also arise due to demonstration effect of a rise in
income, increase in population, and advertisement of new products.

Industry demand is the demand for a commodity which arises from the demand for other
commodities, called ‘parent products’ is called derived demand. Demand for land, fertilizers and
agricultural tools, is a derived demand because these commodities are demanded due to demand for
food. In addition, demand for bricks, cement, and the like are derived demand from the demand
for house and other types of buildings. In general, demand for producer goods or industrial inputs are
a deriveddemand.
Self-Assessment Exercises 3 Answer
1i. Price of the product: This is the most important determinant of demand for a product. The higher
the price of the product, the lower the demand for the product and The lower the price of the product,
the higher the demand for the product.
ii. Price of the related goods, such as substitutes and complements: When two goods are
substitutes for each other, the change in price of one affects the demand for the other in the same
direction. If goods X and Y are substitute goods, then an increase in the price of Xwill give rise to
an increase in the demand for Y.
iii. Consumer’s Income: Income is another factor that determines demand for any product since the
purchasing power of the consumer is determined by the disposable income. Managers need to
know that income-demand relationship is of a more varied nature than those between demand and its
other determinants.
iv. Consumers’ Tastes and Preferences: Consumers’ tastes and preferences play important role in
the determination of the demand for a product. Tastes and preferences generally depend on life
style, social customs, religious values attached to a commodity, habit of the people, age and sex of
the consumers, and the like. Changes in these factors tend to change consumers’ tastes and
preferences.
v. Advertisement Expenditures: Advertisement costs are incurred while attempting to promote
sales. It helps in increasing product demands by informing the potential consumers about the
product’s availability; by showing the product’s superiority over the rival product; by influencing
consumer’s choice against the rival product; and by setting new fashions and changing tastes. The
impact of these causes upward shifts in the demand for the product. All things being equal, as
expenditure on advertisement increases, it is expected that volume of sales will increase.
vi. Consumers’ Expectations: The consumers’ expectations about the future product prices, income,
and supply position of goods play significant role in the determination of demand for goods and
services in the short run. A rational consumer who expects a high rise in the price of a nonperishable
commodity would buy more of it at the high current price with a view to avoiding the pinch of the
high price rise in the future. This partly explains the high demand for fuel during periods of expected
increase of pump price of fuel in Nigeria. On the contrary, if a rational consumer expects a fall in the
price of goods he/she purchases, he/she would postpone the purchase of such goods with a view to
taking advantage of lower prices in the future. This is especially the case for non- essential goods.
This behaviour tends to reduce the current demand for goods whose prices are expected to decrease in
the future.
An expected increase in income would similarly increase current demand for goods and services.
For instance, a corporate announcement of bonuses or upward revision of salary scales would induce
increases in current demand for goods and services.
vii. Demonstration Effect: Whenever new commodities or models of commodities are introduced
in the market, many households buy them not because of their genuine need for them but because
their neighbours have purchased them. This type of purchase arises out of such feelings jealousy,
competition, and equality in the peer group, social inferiority, and the desire to raise once social
status. Purchases based on these factors are the result of what economists refer to as ‘demonstration
effect’ or the ‘Band- Wagon effect’. These effects have positive impacts on commodity demand.

Self-Assessment Exercises 3 Answer


2. Change in quantity demanded (or movement along the demand curve) is associated with a change
in the demand curve by a rise/fall in the price of the commodity. It is expressed in the form of an
expansion of demand or contraction in demand. When the demand of a good rises due to a fall in the
price of the good alone, it is termed as expansion of demand. When the demand of a good falls due to
rise in its price, it is called as contraction in demand. Graphically, it means movement along the
demand curve. At price OP, the demand is OQ. When price falls to OP2, demand rises to OQ2. In this
case the consumer moves from A to B downwards but remains on the same demand curve. When
price rises to OP1, demand falls to OQ1. Once again the consumer moves along the same demand
curve from A to C.

Change in demand (or shift in demand curve) is associated with the change in demand for a
commodity caused by factors other than the price of a commodity such as price of related goods,
income of the consumer etc. It is expressed in the form of an increase or decrease in demand. When at
the given price, the demand of a good increase, it is called increase in demand. When at the given
price, the demand decreases, it is called decrease in demand. Graphically, it means, shift of the
demand curve. At price OP, the demand is OQ. When there is an increase in demand at a given price,
the demand curve shifts to the right. If there is a decrease in demand at the given price, the demand
curve shifts to the left. Thus, change in quantity demanded is due to a fall/rise in price while the
change in demand is due to other factors than price.

Under change in demand, there is a shift of the demand curve from DD to D1D1 which is any increase
in demand while the shift from DD to D2D2 is decease in demand.
UNIT 2: DEMAND FUNCTIONS
Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Demand functions
3.1 Linear Demand function
3.2 Non-linear Demand Function
3.3 Multi-Variate or Dynamic Demand Function
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
Mathematically, we can define a function as a symbolic representation of relationship between
dependent and independent variables. A demand function states the relationship between the demand
for a product (the dependent variable in this case) and its determinants (the independent variables).

It is the nature of demand-price relationship that determines the form of a demand function. The
three most common forms of demand functions are the linear demand function, non-linear demand
function and the multi-variate or dynamic demand function. Each of these forms will be presented
briefly in the following discussions.

2.0 Learning Outcomes


Having gone through the discussions in this unit, you should be able to:
i. Be informed about the theoretical demand functions
ii. Understand the differences between the various types of demandfunctions
iii. Know the principles behind modeling of demand for goods andservices
3.0 Demand Functions
The various types of demand functions relevant to our discussions include:
• The Linear Demand function;
• The non-linear demand function; and,
• The multivariate or dynamic demand function.

Each of these demand functions has specific roles to play in decision making involving the demand
for a firm’s product.

3.1 Linear Demand function


A demand function is said to be linear when its graph results in a straight line. The general form
of a linear demand function is presentedin equation (2.1) below:
𝐷𝑋 = 𝑎 − 𝑏𝑃𝑋 (2.1)
Where a = the demand intercept or the quantity demanded at a zero price, b = the slope of the
demand function or the rate at which quantity demanded of product X changes with respect to the
∆𝐷
price (Px). This slope is defined by ∆𝑃 𝑋
𝑋

The graphical form of this demand function is illustrated in figure 2.1 below.

Figure 2.1: Linear Demand Function

𝐷𝑋 = 𝑎 − 𝑏𝑃𝑋 (2.2)
𝑏𝑃𝑋 = 𝑎 − 𝐷𝑋
𝑎−𝐷𝑋
𝑃𝑋 =
𝑏
𝑎 𝐷𝑋
𝑃𝑋 = −
𝑏 𝑏

Assume 𝑎⁄𝑏 = 𝑎1 and 1⁄𝑏 = 𝑏1, the price function may be written as:
𝑃𝑋 = 𝑎1 − 𝑏𝐷𝑋 (2.3)

3.2 Non-linear Demand Function


A demand function is said to be nonlinear or curvilinear when the slope of the of the demand
function, ∆𝐷⁄∆𝑃, changes along the demand curve. A nonlinear demand function yields a demand
curve unlike the demand line yielded by a linear demand function as in figure 2.1. A nonlinear
demand function is of the form of a power function as given in equation (2.4) below.
𝐷𝑋 = 𝑎𝑃𝑋−𝑏 (2.4)

𝑎
𝐷𝑋 = (2.5)
𝑃𝑋 + 𝑐

Where 𝑎 > 0, 𝑏 > 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐 > 0


You should note that the exponent of the Price variable Px, that is, -b, in the nonlinear demand
function in equation (2.4) is referred to as theprice-elasticity of demand.
The nonlinear demand function can be sketched as in figure 2.2.

Figure 2.2: Non-linear Demand Function

3.3 Multi-Variate or Dynamic Demand Function


The demand functions discussed above are classified as single-variable demand functions, and, as
such, referred to as short-term demand functions. In the long run, neither the individual nor the market
demand for a given product is determined by anyone of its determinants alone, because other
determinants do not remain constant. The long- run demand for a product depends on the composite
impact of all its determinants operating simultaneously. It follows that in order to estimate the long-
term demand for a product, all the relevant determinants must be taken into account.

The long-run demand functions describe the relationship between a demand for a product (the
dependent variable) and its determinants (the independent variables). Demand functions of this type
are referred to as multi-variate or dynamic demand functions. Consider the demand for product X,
(Dx), which depends on such variables as its own price (Px), consumer’s income (Y), price of its
substitutes (Ps), price of the complementary goods (Pc), consumer’s taste (T), and advertisement
expenditure (A), the functional form can be written as:
𝐷𝑋 = 𝑓(𝑃𝑋 , 𝑌, 𝑃𝑆 , 𝑃𝐶 , 𝑇, 𝐴) (2.6)
If the relationship between the demand (Dx) and the quantifiable independent variables, Px, Y, Ps, Pc,
and A, is of a linear form, then the estimable form of the demand function is formulated as:
𝐷𝑋 = 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑃𝑋 + 𝑐𝑌 + 𝑑𝑃𝑆 + 𝑒𝑃𝐶 + 𝑔𝐴) (2.7)
where ‘a’ is a constant and parameters b, c, d, e. and g are the coefficients of relationship between
the demand for product X (Dx) and the respective independent variables.

For the market demand function for a product, other independent variables such as size of the
population (N), and a measure of income distribution, the Gini-coefficient (G) may be included in
equation (2.7).

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise 1


Discuss with relevant mathematics models, the various forms of a demand function.

Self-Assessment Exercises 2
Suppose the demand function for a product is given by: 𝑄𝑑 = 500 − 5𝑃
Compute:
a. quantity demanded at the unit price of N10
b. price to sell 200 units
c. price for zero demand

5.0 Conclusion
This unit has defined a product’s market demand as the sum of individual demands for the product.
In addition, you were informed that a horizontal sum of individual demand schedule will result in the
market demand schedule.

The unit presents five different types of demand:


i. individual and market demand;
ii. demand for firm’s and industry product;
iii. autonomous and derived demand;
iv. demand for durable and non-durable goods; and,
v. short-term and long-term demand.

You also learned that the determinants of demand include: the product’s own price; price of related
goods; consumer tastes; consumer income; consumer expectations; and others.

6.0 Summary
You have learned from this unit that:
1. It is extremely important for a manager to understand the relationship between product’s
demand and its determinants.
2. It is the nature of demand-price relationship that determines theform of the demand function for
a product.
The major forms of demand function include:
i. The linear demand function represented by the equation:
𝐷𝑋 = 𝑎 − 𝑏𝑃𝑋
ii. A nonlinear demand function which is of the form of apower function given as:
𝐷𝑋 = 𝑎𝑃𝑋−𝑏
iii. The multivariate or dynamic demand function, which takes into account all the relevant
determinants of demand.

7.0 References/Further Readings


Boulding. K. E. (1966). Economics Analysis: Microeconomics, 4th Edition, New York Harper and
Row.
Browning, E. K. & Browning, J. M. (1989). Microeconomic Theory and Application, Scott, Foresman
& Co., London, 3th Edition.
Dwivedi, D. N. (2002). Managerial Economics, sixth edition (New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House
Ltd).
Ferguson, C. E. (1972). Microeconomic Theory, 3rd Edition, Illnois, Richard D. Irwin, Inc.
Koutsoyiannis, A. (1979). Modern Microeconomics, 2nd edition, Macmillian.
Hirshleifer, J. (1987). Price Theory and Application, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.
Marshall, A. (1920). Principles of Economics, 8th Edition, London, Macmillian & Co.
Samuelson, W., & Marks, S. (2003). Managerial Economics, 4th edition, Wiley.

Self-Assessment Exercise Answer 1


Relevant mathematics models for the different forms of a demand function.
1. Linear Demand function: A demand function is said to be linear when its graph results in a
straight line. The general form of a linear demand function is:
𝐷𝑋 = 𝑎 − 𝑏𝑃𝑋
Where a = the demand intercept or the quantity demanded at a zero price, b = the slope of the
demand function.

2. Non-linear Demand Function: A demand function is said to be nonlinear or curvilinear when the
slope of the of the demand function, ∆𝐷⁄∆𝑃, changes along the demand curve. A nonlinear demand function
yields a demand curve unlike the demand line yielded by a linear demand function. A nonlinear demand
function is of the form:
𝐷𝑋 = 𝑎𝑃𝑋−𝑏
𝑎
𝐷𝑋 = 𝑃𝑋 + 𝑐

Where 𝑎 > 0, 𝑏 > 0 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐 > 0


You should note that the exponent of the Price variable Px, that is, -b, in the nonlinear demand
function is referred to as theprice-elasticity of demand.

3. Multi-Variate or Dynamic Demand Function: The demand functions discussed above are
classified as single-variable demand functions, and, as such, referred to as short-term demand
functions. In the long run, neither the individual nor the market demand for a given product is
determined by anyone of its determinants alone, because other determinants do not remain constant.
The long- run demand for a product depends on the composite impact of all its determinants
operating simultaneously. It follows that in order to estimate the long-term demand for a product, all
the relevant determinants must be taken into account.

The long-run demand functions describe the relationship between a demand for a product (the
dependent variable) and its determinants (the independent variables). Demand functions of this type
are referred to as multi-variate or dynamic demand functions. Consider the demand for product X,
(Dx), which depends on such variables as its own price (Px), consumer’s income (Y), price of its
substitutes (Ps), price of the complementary goods (Pc), consumer’s taste (T), and advertisement
expenditure (A), the functional form can be written as:
𝐷𝑋 = 𝑓(𝑃𝑋 , 𝑌, 𝑃𝑆 , 𝑃𝐶 , 𝑇, 𝐴)
If the relationship between the demand (Dx) and the quantifiable independent variables, Px, Y, Ps, Pc,
and A, is of a linear form, then the estimable form of the demand function is formulated as:
𝐷𝑋 = 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑃𝑋 + 𝑐𝑌 + 𝑑𝑃𝑆 + 𝑒𝑃𝐶 + 𝑔𝐴)
where ‘a’ is a constant and parameters b, c, d, e. and g are the coefficients of relationship between
the demand for product X (Dx) and the respective independent variables.

Self-Assessment Exercises 3
(a)
𝑃 = 10
𝑄𝑑 = 500 − 5(10)
𝑄𝑑 = 450
(b)
𝑄𝑑 = 200
200 = 500 − 5𝑃
5𝑃 = 500 − 200
5𝑃 = 300
𝑃 = 60
(c)
𝑄𝑑 = 500 − 5𝑃
0 = 500 − 5𝑃
5𝑃 = 500 − 0
5𝑃 = 500
𝑃 = 100
UNIT 3: ELASTICITY OF DEMAND
Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Elasticity of Demand
3.1 Own-Price Elasticity of Demand
3.2 Cross-Elasticity of Demand
3.3 Arc Elasticity
3.4 Point Elasticity
3.5 Determinants of Price-elasticity of demand
3.6 Measuring Price-Elasticity of Demand from a Demand Function
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
From the managerial point of view, the knowledge of the nature of relationship between product’s
demand and its determinants is not sufficient. What is more important is the degree of responsiveness
of demand to changes in its determinants. This degree of responsiveness of demand to changes in its
determinants is referred to as the elasticity of demand for the product in question.

The concept of elasticity of demand plays significant role in pricing decisions. In practical business
decisions, firms would like to pass cost increases over to the consumers through price increases. But
whether increase in price as a result of rising cost is beneficial to the firm will depend on:

i. the price-elasticity of demand for the product; and,


ii. the price-elasticity of demand for its substitutesRaising the price may be beneficial if:
a. demand for a product is less elastic; and,
b. demand for its substitute is much less elastic.
This unit discusses the various methods of measuring price elasticity of demand. The concepts of
price-elasticities of demand mostly used in business decisions are:
i. Own- Price Elasticity
ii. Cross-Price Elasticity

2.0 Learning Outcomes


At the end of this unit, you must have:
i. Been able to define the elasticity of demand
ii. Learned the different types of demand elasticities used inbusiness decisions
iii. Learned how to apply the concepts of demand elasticities in making production and distribution
decisions.

3.0 Elasticity of Demand


The elasticity of demand concepts are presented as follows:

3.1 Own-Price Elasticity of Demand


The own-price elasticity of demand is generally defined as the degree of responsiveness of demand
for a commodity to changes in its own price.
More precisely, it is the percentage change in quantity demanded as a result of one percent change
in the price of the commodity. The working definition is as follows:
𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑑𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑑
𝑒𝜌 = 𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑝𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑒

From this definition, a general formula for the calculation of the coefficient of own-price elasticity is
derived as follows:
∆𝑄 ∆𝑃 ∆𝑄 𝑃
𝑒𝜌 = ÷ = × ∆𝑃
𝑄 𝑃 𝑄
∆𝑄 𝑃 𝜕𝑄 𝑃
𝑒𝜌 = × 𝑄 𝑜𝑟 ×𝑄 (3.1)
∆𝑃 𝜕𝑃

where where 𝑒𝜌 = own-price elasticity. Q = original quantity demand, P = original price, ∆Q = change
in quantity demanded (new quantity – original quantity), ∆P = change in price (new price – original
price).
Note that since the term, ∆Q/∆P, is the slope of the demand function, a minus sign (-) is generally
inserted in the formula in equation (3.1) before the fraction with a view to making the elasticity
coefficient a non-negative value.
The own-price elasticity can be measured between two points on a demand curve (for arc elasticity)
or on a point (for point elasticity).

3.2 Cross-Elasticity of Demand


The cross-elasticity (or cross-price elasticity) can be defined as the degree of responsiveness change
in demand for commodity X as a result of changes in the price of commodity Y. On the other hand,
the cross-elasticity can also be defined as the degree of responsiveness of demand for a commodity
to the changes in price of its substitutes and complementary goods.
The formula for measuring the cross-elasticity of demand for a commodity, X, can be written as:
𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑑𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑑 𝑜𝑓 𝑋
𝑒𝑞𝑥𝑝𝑦 = 𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑝𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑌

∆𝑄𝑋 𝑃
𝑒𝑞𝑥𝑝𝑦 = × 𝑄𝑌 (3.2)
∆𝑃𝑌 𝑋

where X and Y are commodities X and Y respectively.


The cross-elasticity of demand can be used to identify substitute and complementary goods for a
given commodity. If the cross-price elasticity between two goods is positive (𝑒𝑞𝑥𝑝𝑦 > 0), the two
goods may be considered as substitutes to one another. The greater the cross- price elasticity
coefficient, the closer the substitute. Similarly, if the cross- price elasticity is negative (𝑒𝑞𝑥𝑝𝑦 < 0),
the two goods may be considered as complements. The higher the negative cross-elasticity
coefficient, the higher the degree of complementarity.

The concept of cross-elasticity is important in pricing decisions. If the cross-elasticity in response to


the price of substitutes is greater than 1, it would not be advisable to increase the price. Reducing the
price, instead may prove beneficial. If the price of the complementary good is rising, it would be
beneficial to reduce the price of the commodity.

3.3 Arc Elasticity


An arc elasticity measures the elasticity of demand between any two finite points on a given demand
line or curve. It measures of elasticity between two points. For example, m ovement from two points,
A to B indicates a fall in the commodity price from say, N10/unit to N8/unit, so that ∆P = N(10 – 8)
= N2. The decrease in price is assumed to cause an increase in quantity demanded from say, 50 to
60 units, so that ∆Q = 50 – 60 = -10 units. The elasticity from A to B can be computed by substituting
these values into the elasticity formula to get:
∆𝑄 𝑃
𝑒𝜌 = − × 𝑄0 (3.3)
∆𝑃 0

Where 𝑃0 = original price; 𝑄0 = original quantity


10 10
𝑒𝜌 = − × 50 = /−1/ = 1 (the case of unitary elasticity)
2

The elasticity of 1 (unitary elasticity) implies that 1 percent decrease in price of the commodity results
in 1 percent increase in quantity demanded.

It is important to note that one problem associated with the use of arc elasticity is that the elasticity
coefficient changes along the demand line or curve as the direction of price change is reversed, say
from price decrease to price increase in our present example. To confirm this, try re-computing the arc
elasticity if price rises from N8/unit to N10/unit, instead.

3.4 Point Elasticity


Point elasticity is the elasticity of demand at a finite point on a demand line or a demand curve. For
example, at the point C or D on the linear demand line, MN, of figure 10.1, you will calculate the
point elasticity. This is not the same as the arc elasticity between points C and D.

Figure 3.1: Point Elasticity for a Linear Demand Function


A movement from point B towards P would imply change in Price (∆P) becoming smaller and
smaller, such that point P is almost approached. At this point, the change in price is infinitesimally
small. The measurement of elasticity for an infinitesimally small change in price is same as
measurement of elasticity at a point. Point elasticity is measured by the following formula:
𝑃 𝜕𝑄
Point elasticity 𝑒𝜌 = × 𝜕𝑃 (3.4)
𝑄
𝜕𝑄
The derivative, 𝜕𝑃 , is reciprocal of the slope of the demand line or demand curve, that is, 1/dP/dQ.

Point elasticity on a Non-Linear Demand Curve


It is worthy of note that the ratio ∆D/∆P in respect of a non-linear demand curve (function) is
different at each point on the curve. It follows that the technique used in measuring point elasticity
on a linear demand function (line) cannot be directly applied. To measure point elasticity on a non-
linear demand curve, the chosen point is first transformed or imposed on a linear demand line. This
can be done by drawing a tangent line through the chosen point on the non-linear curve. In figure 3.2,
suppose for example, you want to measure elasticity on the non-linear demand curve, DD, at point P,
you need to draw a line MN tangent to the curve through the point, P. Since the line MN passes
through the same point, P as the non-linear demand curve, DD, the slope of the line and the demand
curve at point P is the same. Thus, the elasticity of the demand curve at point P will be equal to that
of the lineat this point. The elasticity of the line at point P can be computed as:
𝑃 𝜕𝑄
𝑒𝜌 = 𝑄 . 𝜕𝑃
𝑃𝑄 𝑄𝑁 𝑄𝑁
= 𝑂𝑄 . 𝑃𝑄 = (3.5)
𝑂𝑄
Figure 3.2: Measuring Elasticity on Non-Linear Demand Curve

3.5 Determinants of Price-elasticity of demand


The price-elasticity of demand varies between zero and infinity (0 ≤ ep ≤ ∞).
The price-elasticity of demand for a product within this range willdepend on the following factors:
1. Availability of Substitutes for the product: This is one of the most important determinants of the
price-elasticity of demand for a product. The higher the degree of closeness between the commodity
and its substitutes, the greater the price-elasticity of demand for the commodity.
2. Nature of the Commodity: Commodities can be grouped as luxuries, comforts, and necessities.
The demand for luxury goods is more price-elastic than the demand for necessities and comforts.
This is so because the consumption of luxury goods can be dispensed with or postponed when their
prices rise. On the other hand, the consumption of necessities cannot be postponed and hence, their
demand is price- inelastic. Comforts have more elastic demand than necessities, and less elastic
demand than luxuries.
3. Weightage in the Total Consumption: The proportion of income which consumers spend on a
particular commodity influences the elasticity of demand for such commodity. The larger the
proportion of income spent on a commodity, the greater will be the elasticity of demand for such
commodity, and vice versa.
4. Time factor in adjustment of Consumption pattern: Price- elasticity of demand depends on the
time consumers need to adjust their consumption pattern to a new price. The longer the adjustment
time, the greater the price-elasticity of demand.
5. Range of Commodity Use: The range of uses of a given commodity can affect the elasticity of
demand for such commodity. The wider the range of use of a product, the higher the elasticity of
demand for such product. Electricity, for example, has a wide range of use including, lighting,
cooking, and industrial activities. The demand for electricity therefore has greater elasticity.

3.6 Measuring Price-Elasticity of Demand from a Demand Function


The price-elasticity of demand for a product can be measured directly from the demand function. We
look at this from the perspective of the linear demand function, as well as the non-linear demand
function.

For a given linear demand function, you can measure the price-elasticity by first taking the first
𝜕𝑄⁄
derivative with respect to the price variable, P, ( 𝜕𝑃), if price is the independent variable, or
𝜕𝑄⁄
with respect to the quantity variable, Q, ( 𝜕𝑃), if quantity is the independent variable. The result
will then be multiplied by the price-quantity ratio (P/Q) for the first case, and the quantity-price ratio
𝑄
( ⁄𝑃), for the second case.

Example:
If the demand function is given as:
𝑄𝑑 = 20 − 2𝑃 (3.6)
Price is N5 and the quantity demanded is 15 units. Determine the price elasticity of demand and
interpret the result.
𝑃 𝜕𝑄
𝑒𝜌 = × 𝜕𝑃
𝑄
𝜕𝑄 𝜕(20−2𝑃)
= = -2
𝜕𝑃 𝜕𝑃
5
𝑒𝜌 = × −2
15
−2
= =/−0.7/= 0.7
3

0.7< 1
This is inelastic

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercises 1


Differentiate between own-price elasticities and cross-price elasticities of demand.

Self-Assessment Exercises 2
Discuss the determinants of price elasticity of demand.

5.0 Conclusion
You can define a demand function as a symbolic representation of relationship between the demand
for a product and its determinants. When established, this relationship can help you predict what
will happen to the demand for your product when the determinants of the demand changes. A demand
function can take any of the following forms: (i) linear; non-linear; or multivariate.

6.0 Summary
The own-price elasticity of demand is generally defined as the degree of responsiveness of demand
for a commodity to changes in its own price. More precisely, it is the percentage change in quantity
demanded as a result of one percent change in the price of the commodity. The own- price elasticity
can be measured between two points on a demand curve (for arc elasticity) or on a point (for point
elasticity).

The cross-elasticity (or cross-price elasticity) can be defined as the degree of responsiveness of
demand for a commodity to the changes in price of its substitutes and complementary goods. The
cross-elasticity of demand can be used to identify substitute and complementary goods for a given
commodity. If the cross-price elasticity between two goods is positive, the two goods may be
considered as substitutes to one another. The greater the cross-price elasticity coefficient, the
closer the substitute. Similarly, if the cross-price elasticity is negative, the two goods may be
considered as complements. The higher the negative cross-elasticity coefficient, the higher the degree
of complementarity.

The determinants of a commodity’s price-elasticity of demand include: availability of substitutes;


nature of the commodity; weightage of the total consumption; time factor in adjustment of
consumption pattern;and, range of commodity use.

7.0 References/Further Readings


Baumol, W. J. (1985). Economic Theory and operations Analysis, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi
Bilas, R. A. (1971). Microeconomic Theory, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Boulding. K. E. (1966). Economics Analysis: Microeconomics, 4th Edition, New York Harper and
Row.
Browning, E. K. & Browning, J. M. (1989). Microeconomic Theory and Application, Scott, Foresman
& Co., London, 3th Edition.
Douglas, E. J. (1983). Managerial Economics: Theory and Practice and problems, Prentice-Hall Inc.,
New Jersey. 2nd edition.
Ferguson, C. E. (1972). Microeconomic Theory, 3rd Edition, Illnois, Richard D. Irwin, Inc.
Hirshleifer, J. (1987). Price Theory and Application, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.
Nicholson, W. (1975). Intermediate Microeconomics and Its Application, Dryden Press, Hindale.
Marshall, A. (1920). Principles of Economics, 8th Edition, London, Macmillian & Co.
Samuelson, W., & Marks, S. (2003). Managerial Economics, 4th ed., Wiley.
Webb, S. C. (1976). Managerial Economics, Houghton Mifflin, Boston.

Self-Assessment Exercises 1 Answer


The own-price elasticity of demand is the degree of responsiveness of demand for a commodity to
changes in its own price.
More precisely, it is the percentage change in quantity demanded as a result of one percent change
in the price of the commodity. The working definition is as follows:
𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑑𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑑
𝑒𝜌 =
𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑝𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑒

From this definition, a general formula for the calculation of the coefficient of own-price elasticity is
derived as follows:
∆𝑄 ∆𝑃 ∆𝑄 𝑃
𝑒𝜌 = ÷ = × ∆𝑃
𝑄 𝑃 𝑄
∆𝑄 𝑃 𝜕𝑄 𝑃
𝑒𝜌 = × 𝑄 𝑜𝑟 ×𝑄
∆𝑃 𝜕𝑃

where where 𝑒𝜌 = own-price elasticity. Q = original quantity demand, P = original price, ∆Q = change
in quantity demanded (new quantity – original quantity), ∆P = change in price (new price – original
price).
If 𝑒𝜌 < 1, it an inelastic commodity
If 𝑒𝜌 ˃1, it an elastic commodity
If 𝑒𝜌 = 1, it a unity commodity

The cross-elasticity (or cross-price elasticity) can be defined as the degree of responsiveness change
in demand for commodity X as a result of changes in the price of commodity Y. On the other hand,
the cross-elasticity can also be defined as the degree of responsiveness of demand for a commodity
to the changes in price of its substitutes and complementary goods.
The formula for measuring the cross-elasticity of demand for a commodity, X, can be written as:
𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑑𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑑 𝑜𝑓 𝑋
𝑒𝑞𝑥𝑝𝑦 = 𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑝𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑌

∆𝑄𝑋 𝑃
𝑒𝑞𝑥𝑝𝑦 = × 𝑄𝑌
∆𝑃𝑌 𝑋

where X and Y are commodities X and Y respectively.


The cross-elasticity of demand can be used to identify substitute and complementary goods for a
given commodity. If the cross-price elasticity between two goods is positive (𝑒𝑞𝑥𝑝𝑦 > 0), the two
goods may be considered as substitutes to one another. The greater the cross- price elasticity
coefficient, the closer the substitute. Similarly, if the cross- price elasticity is negative (𝑒𝑞𝑥𝑝𝑦 < 0),
the two goods may be considered as complements. The higher the negative cross-elasticity
coefficient, the higher the degree of complementarity.

Self-Assessment Exercises 2 Answer


The determinants of price elasticity of demand are:
1. Availability of Substitutes for the product: This is one of the most important determinants of the
price-elasticity of demand for a product. The higher the degree of closeness between the commodity
and its substitutes, the greater the price-elasticity of demand for the commodity.
2. Nature of the Commodity: Commodities can be grouped as luxuries, comforts, and necessities.
The demand for luxury goods is more price-elastic than the demand for necessities and comforts.
This is so because the consumption of luxury goods can be dispensed with or postponed when their
prices rise. On the other hand, the consumption of necessities cannot be postponed and hence, their
demand is price- inelastic. Comforts have more elastic demand than necessities, and less elastic
demand than luxuries.
3. Weightage in the Total Consumption: The proportion of income which consumers spend on a
particular commodity influences the elasticity of demand for such commodity. The larger the
proportion of income spent on a commodity, the greater will be the elasticity of demand for such
commodity, and vice versa.
4. Time factor in adjustment of Consumption pattern: Price- elasticity of demand depends on the
time consumers need to adjust their consumption pattern to a new price. The longer the adjustment
time, the greater the price-elasticity of demand.
5. Range of Commodity Use: The range of uses of a given commodity can affect the elasticity of
demand for such commodity. The wider the range of use of a product, the higher the elasticity of
demand for such product. Electricity, for example, has a wide range of use including, lighting,
cooking, and industrial activities. The demand for electricity therefore has greater elasticity.
UNIT 4: PRICE ELASTICITY, REVENUES AND INCOME ELASTICITY OF DEMAND
Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Relationships between Price elasticity and Revenues
3.1 Price-Elasticity and Total Revenue
3.2 Price-Elasticity and Marginal Revenue
3.3 Income-Elasticity of Demand
3.4 Advertisement- or Promotional-Elasticity of Sales
3.5 Elasticity of Price-Expectations
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
This unit examines some important applications of price-elasticity of demand, especially in the areas
of total revenue and marginal revenue from the sale of goods and services. It also extends the
discussions of elasticity to those of income, advertisement, and price expectations.

2.0 Learning Outcomes


By the end of this unit, you should be able to:
i. Expand your understanding of elasticity of demand
ii. Know how demand elasticity, revenue, and income are related
iii. Apply the concept of demand elasticity to sales forecasts andplanning.

3.0 Relationships between Price Elasticity and Revenues


3.1 Price-Elasticity and Total Revenue
A revenue-maximising firm would be interested in knowing whether increasing or decreasing the
commodity price would maximise revenue. The price-elasticity of demand for the firm’s product at
different price levels would provide the answer this question. The answer would come from the fact
that if 𝑒𝜌 > 1, then decreasing the price will increase the total revenue, and if 𝑒𝜌 < 1,then
increasing the price will increase the total revenue.

Table 4.1: Price-Elasticity, Price-Change and Change in Total Revenue

Figure 4.1: Price Elasticity and Total Revenue

3.2 Price-Elasticity and Marginal Revenue


Note that Marginal Revenue (MR) is the first derivative of the total revenue (TR) function, and that
TR = PQ (P = unit price; Q = quantity sold). The relationship between price-elasticity, MR, and TR
is shown by the following derivations:
TR = P.Q, (4.1)
𝜕(𝑃.𝑄) 𝜕𝑃
𝑀𝑅 = = 𝑃 + 𝑄 𝜕𝑄
𝜕𝑄
𝑄 𝜕𝑃
𝑀𝑅 = 𝑃 (1 + 𝑃 × 𝜕𝑄) (4.2)
𝑄 𝜕𝑃
Note that 𝑃 × 𝜕𝑄 is the reciprocal of price elasticity in equation (3.1), that is,
𝑄 𝜕𝑃 1
× 𝜕𝑄 = − 𝑒
𝑃 𝜌

1 𝑄 𝜕𝑃
Substitute − 𝑒 for 𝑃 × 𝜕𝑄
𝜌

1
𝑀𝑅 = 𝑃 (1 − 𝑒 ) (4.3)
𝜌

Given this relationship between Marginal Revenue (MR) and price- elasticity of demand (ep), the
deciding manager can easily know whether it will be beneficial to change the price.

From equation (4.3), you can deduce that if ep = 1, MR = 0. It follows that change in price will not
affect the total revenue (TR).

If ep < 1, MR < 0, TR decreases when price decreases, and TR increases when price increases. And if
ep > 1, MR > 0, TR increases when price decreases, and vice versa.

3.3 Income-Elasticity of Demand


The income-elasticity of demand can be defined as the degree of responsiveness of demand to
changes in the consumer’s income. Note that unlike the price-elasticity of demand, which is
always negative due to the negative slope of the demand function, the income-elasticity of demand is
always positive. This is because of the positive relationship between demand and the consumer’s
income. This is the case however, for normal goods. In the case of inferior goods, the income-
elasticity of demand is always negative. This is so because the demand for inferior goods decreases
with increases in consumer’s income, and vice versa.

The income-elasticity of demand for a commodity, say X can be computed by:


𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑑𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑑 𝑜𝑓 𝑋
𝑒𝑦 =
𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑌
∆𝑄𝑋 𝑌
𝑒𝑦 = ×𝑄 (4.4)
∆𝑌 𝑋

Where, 𝑒𝑦 = income-elasticity of demand; Y = consumer’s income; Qx = quantity demanded of


commodity X.

As noted above, for all normal goods, the income-elasticity is positive. However, the degree or
magnitude of elasticity varies in accordance with the nature and type of commodities. Consumer
goods of the three categories: necessities, comforts, and luxuries have different elasticities. The
general pattern of income-elasticities of different kinds of goods for increase in income and their
effects on sales is given intable 4.2 below for managers to take note:

Table 4.2: Magnitude of Income-Elasticity for different Categories of Goods

Own-price and cross-elasticities of demand are specifically significant in the pricing of products
aimed at the maximisation of short-run revenues. Income-elasticity of products is highly significant in
long-run planning and management of production, especially during the period of business cycles.

The concept of income-elasticity can be used in the estimation of future demand, provided that the
rate of increase in income and income- elasticity of demand for the given product is known. This
can be useful in forecasting demand for expected changes in consumers’ personal incomes, other
things remaining the same. Knowledge of income-elasticity of demand is also helpful in the
avoidance of over- and under- production.

3.4 Advertisement- or Promotional-Elasticity of Sales


It is a known fact that expenditure on advertisements and on other sales promotion activities help in
promoting sales, but not in the same magnitude or degree at all levels of sales. The concept of
advertisement elasticity is found useful in the determination of optimum level of advertisement
expenditure. This concept assumes a greater significance in deciding advertisement expenditure than
other decision variables. This is so especially when the government imposes restriction on
advertisement cost (as is the case in most developed economies), or there is competitive advertising
by the rival firms.

By definition, advertisement-elasticity of sales is the degree of responsiveness of sales to changes in


advertisement expenditures. It canbe computed by the formula:
𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑠𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑠
𝑒𝐴 = 𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑎𝑑𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑡𝑖𝑠𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡
∆𝑆 𝐴
𝑒𝐴 = ×𝑆 (4.5)
∆𝐴

where S = sales; ∆S = change in sales; A = initial advertisement cost; and, ∆A = additional


expenditure on advertisement.
The advertisement-elasticity of sales varies between zero and infinity. Thus,
0 ≤ eA ≤ ∞

Some values of the advertisement-elasticity of sales can be interpreted according to table 4.3 below:

Table 4.3: Interpretation of Advertisement-Elasticity of Sales


Elasticity (eA) Interpretation
eA = 0 Sales do not respond to advertisement expenditure
eA <1 Increase in total Sales is less than proportionate to the
increase in advertisement expenditure
eA = 1 Sales increase in proportion to the increase in expenditure on
Advertisement
eA > 1 Sales increase at a higher rate than the rate of increase in
advertisement expenditure.

Some of the important factors affecting the advertisement-elasticity


of sales can be outlined as follows:
i. The level of total sales: As sales increase, the advertisement-elasticity of sales decreases.
ii. Advertisement by rival firms: In a highly competitive market, the effectiveness of advertisement
by a firm is determined by the relative effectiveness of advertisement by the rival firms
iii. Cumulative effect of past advertisements. Additional doses of advertisement expenditures do
have cumulative effect on the promotion of sales, and this may considerably increase the
advertisement-elasticity of sales.

Other factors affecting the advertisement-elasticity of sales are those factors demand for the product,
including change in product’s price; consumer’s income; growth of substitute goods and their prices.

3.5 Elasticity of Price-Expectations


During the period of price fluctuations, consumer’s price expectations play a significant role in
determining demand for a given commodity. The price-expectation-elasticity refers to the expected
change in future price as a result of changes in current prices of a given product. The elasticity of
price-expectation is defined and measured by the following formula:

∆𝑃𝑓/𝑃𝑓 ∆𝑃𝑓 ∆𝑃𝑐


𝑒𝑥 = = × (4.6)
∆𝑃𝑐/𝑃𝑐 ∆𝑃𝑐 ∆𝑃𝑓

where Pc and Pf are current and future prices, respectively.

The coefficient ex is a measure of expected percentage change in future price due to a 1 percent
change in current price. ex > 1 implies that future change in price will be greater than the current
change in price, and vice versa. ex = 1 implies that the future change in price will be equal to the
change in current price.

The concept of elasticity of price-expectation is very useful in future pricing policies. For instance, if
ex > 1, sellers will be able to sell more in the future at higher prices. Accordingly, businesspeople
may determine their future pricing policies.

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise 1


Describe the relationship between price elasticity and revenues concepts

Self-Assessment Exercise 2
1. Define income-elasticity of demand.
2. What are interpretations of income-elasticity of demand results?

Self-Assessment Exercise 3
Why does advertisement-elasticity of demand important to managers?

Self-Assessment Exercise 4
Discuss elasticity of price-expectations.

5.0 Conclusion
This unit has exposed you further to the concepts and applications of elasticity of demand. You have
observed the important relationship between price elasticity of demand and revenue, and the
relationship between price elasticity of demand and marginal revenue. These relationships will help
you in your pricing decisions, especially when your business objective is to maximise sales revenue.

You also learned that consumers’ price expectations play significant roles in determining the
demand for your commodity. This is especially the case for periods of general price fluctuations.

6.0 Summary
The points made by this unit can be summarised by you as follows:
1. A revenue-maximising firm would be interested in knowing whether increasing or decreasing the
commodity price would maximise revenue. The price-elasticity of demand for the firm’s product at
different price levels would provide the answer this question. The answer would come from the
fact that if ep > 1, then decreasing the price will increase the total revenue, and if ep < 1, then
increasing the price will increase the total revenue.
2. The income-elasticity of demand can be defined as the degree of responsiveness of demand to
changes in the consumer’s income. The income-elasticity of demand is always positive, especially
for normal goods. In the case of inferior goods, the income- elasticity of demand is always negative.
This is so because the demand for inferior goods decreases with increases in consumer’s income, and
vice versa.
3. The concept of advertisement elasticity is found useful in the determination of optimum level of
advertisement expenditure. This concept assumes a greater significance in deciding advertisement
expenditure than other decision variables.
4. During the period of price fluctuations, consumer’s price expectations play a significant role in
determining demand for a given commodity. The price-expectation- elasticity refers to the expected
change in future price as a result of changes in current prices of a given product.

7.0 References/Further Readings


Baumol, W. J. (1985). Economic Theory and operations Analysis, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi
Bilas, R. A. (1971). Microeconomic Theory, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Boulding. K. E. (1966). Economics Analysis: Microeconomics, 4th Edition, New York Harper and
Row.
Browning, E. K. & Browning, J. M. (1989). Microeconomic Theory and Application, Scott, Foresman
& Co., London, 3th Edition.
Douglas, E. J. (1983). Managerial Economics: Theory and Practice and problems, 2nd edition.
Prentice-Hall Inc., New Jersey.
Dwivedi, D. N. (2002). Managerial Economics, sixth edition (New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House
Ltd).
Ferguson, C. E. (1972). Microeconomic Theory, 3rd Edition, Illnois, Richard D. Irwin, Inc.
Hirshleifer, J. (1987). Price Theory and Application, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.
Nicholson, W. (1975). Intermediate Microeconomics and Its Application, Dryden Press, Hindale.
Marshall, A. (1920). Principles of Economics, 8th Edition, London, Macmillian & Co.
Samuelson, W., & Marks, S. (2003). Managerial Economics, 4th ed., Wiley.
Webb, S. C. (1976). Managerial Economics, Houghton Mifflin, Boston.

Self-Assessment Exercise 1 Answer


Price-Elasticity and Total Revenue
A revenue-maximising firm would be interested in knowing whether increasing or decreasing the
commodity price would maximise revenue. The price-elasticity of demand for the firm’s product at
different price levels would provide the answer this question. The answer would come from the fact
that if 𝑒𝜌 > 1, then decreasing the price will increase the total revenue, and if 𝑒𝜌 < 1,then
increasing the price will increase the total revenue.

Price-Elasticity and Marginal Revenue


Marginal Revenue (MR) is the first derivative of the total revenue (TR) function, and that TR = PQ (P
= unit price; Q = quantity sold). The relationship between price-elasticity, MR, and TR is shown by
the following derivations:
TR = P.Q,
𝜕(𝑃.𝑄) 𝜕𝑃
𝑀𝑅 = = 𝑃 + 𝑄 𝜕𝑄
𝜕𝑄
𝑄 𝜕𝑃
𝑀𝑅 = 𝑃 (1 + 𝑃 × 𝜕𝑄)
𝑄 𝜕𝑃 𝑃 𝜕𝑄
Note that 𝑃 × 𝜕𝑄 is the reciprocal of price elasticity, 𝑄 × 𝜕𝑃
𝑄 𝜕𝑃 1
× 𝜕𝑄 = − 𝑒
𝑃 𝜌
1 𝑄 𝜕𝑃
Substitute − for ×
𝑒𝜌 𝑃 𝜕𝑄

1
𝑀𝑅 = 𝑃 (1 − 𝑒 )
𝜌

Given this relationship between Marginal Revenue (MR) and price- elasticity of demand (ep), the
deciding manager can easily know whether it will be beneficial to change the price.

From MR equation, you can deduce that if ep = 1, MR = 0. It follows that change in price will not
affect the total revenue (TR).

If ep < 1, MR < 0, TR decreases when price decreases, and TR increases when price increases. And if
ep > 1, MR > 0, TR increases when price decreases, and vice versa.

Self-Assessment Exercise 2 Answer


1. The income-elasticity of demand can be defined as the degree of responsiveness of demand to
changes in the consumer’s income.

The income-elasticity of demand for a commodity, say X can be computed by:


𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑑𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑑𝑒𝑑 𝑜𝑓 𝑋
𝑒𝑦 = 𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑌
∆𝑄𝑋 𝑌
𝑒𝑦 = ×𝑄
∆𝑌 𝑋

Where, 𝑒𝑦 = income-elasticity of demand; Y = consumer’s income; Qx = quantity demanded of


commodity X.

Self-Assessment Exercise 2 Answer


2. For all normal goods, the income-elasticity is positive 𝑒𝑦 ˃ 0. However, the degree or magnitude of
elasticity varies in accordance with the nature and type of commodities. An increase in income will
lead to increase in the consumption of the commodity.
For inferior good, the income-elasticity is positive 𝑒𝑦 < 0. An increase in income will lead to reduction in
consumption or the consumption of the commodity will remain unchanged.

Self-Assessment Exercise 3 Answer


Advertisement elasticity is the degree of responsiveness change in of sales to changes in
advertisement expenditures.
𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑠𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑠
𝑒𝐴 = 𝑃𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑎𝑑𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑡𝑖𝑠𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝑡
∆𝑆 𝐴
𝑒𝐴 = ×𝑆
∆𝐴

where S = sales; ∆S = change in sales; A = initial advertisement cost; and, ∆A = additional


expenditure on advertisement.
If eA <1 - Increase in total Sales is less than proportionate to the increase in advertisement
expenditure.
If eA > 1 - Sales increase at a higher rate than the rate of increase in advertisement expenditure.
If eA = 1 - Sales increase in proportion to the increase in expenditure on advertisement

Self-Assessment Exercise 4 Answer


The price-expectation-elasticity refers to the expected change in future price as a result of changes in
current prices of a given product.
The elasticity of price-expectation is defined and measured by the following formula:
∆𝑃𝑓/𝑃𝑓 ∆𝑃𝑓 ∆𝑃𝑐
𝑒𝑥 = = ×
∆𝑃𝑐/𝑃𝑐 ∆𝑃𝑐 ∆𝑃𝑓

where Pc and Pf are current and future prices, respectively.

The coefficient ex is a measure of expected percentage change in future price due to a 1 percent
change in current price. ex > 1 implies that future change in price will be greater than the current
change in price, and vice versa. ex = 1 implies that the future change in price will be equal to the
change in current price.

The concept of elasticity of price-expectation is very useful in future pricing policies. For instance, if
ex > 1, sellers will be able to sell more in the future at higher prices. Accordingly, businesspeople
may determine their future pricing policies.
UNIT 5: DEMAND FORECASTING
Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Demand Forecasting
3.1 Demand Forecasting Techniques
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
The term demand forecasting in our context simply means predicting the future demand for a product.
Information regarding future demand is essential for scheduling and planning production, acquisition
of raw materials, acquisition of finance, and advertising. Forecasting is most useful where large-scale
production is involved and production requires long gestation period.

2.0 Learning Outcomes


When you go through this unit, you will be able to:
i. Know about how to forecast demand for your products
ii. Have at your finger tips the latest forecasting techniques
iii. Formulate models that can aid you in forecasting demand

3.0 Demand Forecasting


3.1 Demand Forecasting Techniques
There are many techniques employed in demand forecasting, but of most important in our discussions
are the Survey and Statistical methods.
i. The Survey Techniques
Survey techniques are used where the purpose is to make short-run demand forecasts. This technique
uses consumer surveys to collect information about their intentions and future purchase plans. It
involves:
a. survey of potential consumers to elicit information on their intentions and plans;
b. opinion polling of experts, that is, opinion survey of market experts and sales representatives;

The methods used in conducting the survey of consumers and experts include:
Consumer Survey Methods (direct interviews): Direct interview of the potential consumers may
be in the form of:
a. Complete Enumeration. In this case, almost all the consumers or users of the product in question
are contacted to ascertain their future of purchasing the product. The quantities indicated by the
consumers are added together to obtain the probable demand for the product. If, for example, a
majority of n out of m households in a given geographical location indicate the quantity, (q) they
will be willing to purchase of a commodity, then the total probable demand (𝐷𝑝 ) may be obtained
as:
𝐷𝑝 = 𝑞1 + 𝑞2 + 𝑞3 + ⋯ + 𝑞𝑛
= ∑𝑛𝑖=1 𝑞𝑖 (5.1)
Where 𝑞1 , 𝑞2 , 𝑞3 … 𝑛, represent demand by individual households.
This method can, however, be useful for products whose consumers are concentrated in a certain
locality. It may not be physically possible for cases where the market is widely dispersed.

b. Sample Survey. In a sample survey, only few potential consumers and users of the products are
selected as respondents from the relevant market. The survey may take the form of either direct
interview or mailed questionnaire to the sample consumers. On the basis of information obtained
thereof, the probable demand (Dp) can be estimated by the simple formula:
𝐷𝑝 = 𝐻𝑅(𝐻, 𝐴𝐷)𝐻𝑆 (5.2)
where HR = number of households indicating demand for the product ; HS = the number of
households surveyed; H = the census number of households from the relevant market, and AD =
average expected demand as indicated by the households survey = total quantity of demand indicated
÷ number of households.
Though this method is widely used for forecasting demand, it has limitations similar to those
of the complete enumeration method.
a. The End-Use Method. This method of forecasting demand has a considerable theoretical and
practical importance, especially in forecasting demand for inputs. The method involves four basic
stages:
Stage 1: This stage requires that all the possible users of the product in question be identified and
listed.
Stage 2: The second stage involves fixing suitable technical norms of consumption, expressed in
either per unit of production of the complete product or, in some cases, per unit of investment or per
capita use.
Stage 3: Having established the technical norms of consumption for the different industries and
other end uses of the product, the third step is the application of the norms. This requires the
knowledge of the desired or targeted levels of output of the individual industries for the reference
year, and also the likely development in other economic activities for which the product is used.
Stage 4: The final stage in the end-use method of demand forecasting involves the aggregation of the
product-wise or use-wise content of the item for which the demand is to be forecast. Result of this
aggregation gives the estimate of demand for the product as a whole for the terminal year in question.

Opinion Poll Methods: These methods aim at collecting opinions of those possessing knowledge of
the market, such as the sales representatives, sales executives, professional marketing experts, and
marketing consultants. The opinion poll methods include:
(a) The Expert-Opinion method;
(b) Delphi method; and,
(c) Market Studies and Experiments

(a) The Expert-Opinion Method: This method involves the use of sales representatives in the
assessment of demand for the product in the areas, States or cities they represent. The sales
representatives are expected to know the future purchasing plans of consumers they transact business
with. The estimates of demand thus obtained from the different sales representatives at different
areas, States and cities are added up to getthe overall probable demand for the product in question.
(b) The Delphi Method: This method of demand forecasting is an extension of the simple expert
opinion poll method. It is used to consolidate the divergent expert opinions and to arrive at a
compromise estimate of future demand.
In the Delphi method, the experts are provided with some information on estimates of forecasts of
other experts, along with the underlying assumptions. It will then be the consensus of the experts
about the forecasts that will become the final forecast for the future demand.
(c) Market Studies and Experiments: This method requires that firms first select some areas of
representative markets, about four cities with similar features in terms of population, income level,
cultural and social background, occupational distribution, and consumer preferences and choices. This
is followed by market experiments involving changing prices, advertisement expenditures, and
other controllable variables in the demand function, all things being equal. These variables are
changed over time, either simultaneously in all the markets or in selected markets. Having
introduced these changes, the consequent changes in demand over a period of time are then recorded.
Based on these data, elasticity coefficients are then computed, and these coefficients are used to
assess the forecast demand for the product.

ii. Statistical Techniques


The statistical techniques of demand forecasting use historical (or time- series), and cross- section
data for estimating long-term demand for a product. The techniques are found more reliable than
those of the survey techniques. They include: (i) the Trend Projection techniques; (ii) the Barometric
techniques; and, (iii) the Econometric techniques. Our discussions will, however, concentrate on the
Econometric techniques as these are more superior and reliable than the Trend Projection and
Barometric techniques.

iii. The Econometric Techniques


The Econometric techniques include: (i) Regression method; and, (ii) Simultaneous Equation method.
a. Regression Method
Regression analysis is found to be the most popular method of demand estimation and/or forecasting.
It combines economic theory and statistical techniques of estimation. The economic theory specifies
the determinants of demand and the nature of the relationship between the demand for a product and
its determinants. It helps in ascertaining the general form of demand function. Statistical techniques
on the other hand are employed in estimating the values of the parameters in the estimated equation.
In regression models, the quantity to be forecast in the demand function is the dependent variable,
and the determinants of demand are the independent or explanatory variables.

In specifying the demand functions for various commodities, the forecaster may come across many
commodities whose demand depends, at large, on a single independent variable. For instance,
suppose the demand for sugar in a given geographical area is found to depend largely on the
population, then the demand function for sugar will be referred to as a single-variable demand
function. But if it is found that demand functions for fruits and vegetables depend on a number of
variables such as, their own-prices, substitutes, household income, population, and the like, then such
demand functions are referred to as multi-variable demand functions. The single regression equation
is used for single-variable demand functions, while the multi-variable equation is used for multi-
variable demand functions. The single- variable and multi-variable regressions are outlined below.

The Simple or Bivariate Regression Technique


As mentioned earlier, in a simple regression technique, a single independent variable is used in
estimating the statistical value of the dependent variable or the variable to be forecast. This technique
is similar to trend fitting, though, in trend fitting, the independent variable is time, t, while in the
case of simple regression, and the chosen independent variable is the single most important
determinant of demand.

Suppose we want to forecast the demand for sugar, for example, for particular periods on the basis of
some past data, we would estimate the regression equation of the form:
𝑌 = 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑋 (5.3)
Where, Y represents the quantity of sugar to be demanded; and, X represents the single variable,
population, a and b are constants.

The parameters a and b can be estimated, using the past data, by solving the following corresponding
linear equations for a and b:
∑ 𝑌𝑖 = 𝑛𝑎 + 𝑏 ∑ 𝑋𝑖 (5.4)
∑ 𝑋𝑖 𝑌𝑖 = 𝑎 ∑ 𝑋𝑖 + 𝑏 ∑ 𝑋𝑖 2 (5.5)
The procedures for calculating the terms in equations (5.4) and (5.5) can be illustrated by the
following example.
Consider the following hypothetical past data on the demand for sugar for the years 2010 to2016:

Table 5.1: Demand for Sugar


Year Population (Millions) Quantity of sugar
demanded (000’s)
2010 10 40
2011 12 50
2012 15 60
2013 20 70
2014 25 80
2015 30 90
2016 40 100

Using this hypothetical data, we can calculate the terms as shown in table 1.2 below:

Solution
Table 5.2: Calculation of Terms of the Linear Equations in Simple Regression
Year 𝑋𝑖 𝑌𝑖 𝑋𝑖 2 𝑋𝑖 𝑌𝑖
2010 10 40 100 400
2011 12 50 144 600
2012 15 60 225 900
2013 20 70 400 1400
2014 25 80 625 2000
2015 30 90 900 2700
2016 40 100 1600 4000
n=7 ∑ 𝑋𝑖 ∑ 𝑌𝑖 ∑ 𝑋𝑖 2 ∑ 𝑋𝑖 𝑌𝑖

= 152 = 490 = 3994 = 1200


Substituting the related values from table 5.2 into equations (5.4)and (5.5), we get:
490 = 7a + 152b (5.6)
12000 = 152a + 3994b (5.7)
Solving simultaneously for a and b in the above equations, we obtain:
a = 27.44; b = 1.96. substituting these values into the regression equation (5.3), the estimated
regression equation becomes:
Y = 27.44 + 1.96X (5.8)
With the regression in equation (5.8), the demand for the commodity concerned can be easily forecast
for any period provided that the figure for the population or any single determinant of demand is
known. Suppose the population for the year 2008 is projected to be 100 million then the demand for
sugar, according to our example, would be estimated using the regression equation as:
Y = 27.44 + 1.96(100) = 27.44 + 1960 = 223,440 units.

The simple regression technique is based on the following assumptions:


1. The independent variable will continue to grow at the estimated growth rate, 1.96 according to
regression in equation (5.8);
2. The relationship between the dependent and independent variables will continue to remain the
same in the future as in the past.

The Multi-Variate Regression Technique


The technique is used in cases where the demand for a commodity is determined to be a function of
many independent variables, or where the explanatory variables are greater than one. The analysis in
this technique is referred to as multiple regression analysis.

The procedure of multiple regression analysis involves the followingsteps:


Step One: Specification of the independent or explanatory variables, that is, the variables that
explain the variations in demand for the commodity in question. These variables are identified from
the determinants of demand as listed earlier.
Step Two: Collection of time-series data on the independent variable. Here, the necessary data on
both the dependent (the demand for the commodity) and independent variables (the determinants of
demand) are collected.
Step Three: Specification of the Regression Equation. The reliability of the demand forecast depends
to a large extent on the form of regression equation and the degree of consistency of the explanatory
variables in the estimated demand function. The greater the degree of consistency, the higher will
be the reliability of the estimated demand function andvice versa.
The final step is to employ the necessary statistical technique in estimating the parameters of the
regression equation. Some common forms of multi-variate demand functions are as follows:

1. The Linear Function. The linear demand function is where the relationship between the demand
and its determinants is formulated by a straight line. The most common type of this equation is of the
form:
𝑄𝑋 = ∝ −𝑏𝑃𝑋 + 𝑐𝑌 + 𝑑𝑃𝑆 + 𝑗𝐴 (5.9)
where Qx = quantity demanded of commodity X; Px = unit price of commodity X; Y = consumer’s
income; Ps = price of substitute good; A= advertisement expenditure; α is a constant (or the
demand intercept), and b, c, d, and j are the parameters (or regression coefficients) expressing the
relationship between demand and Px, Y, Ps, and A, respectively.

In linear demand functions, quantity demanded is assumed to change with changes in


independent variables at a constant rate. The parameters are estimated by using the least- squares
method. Having estimated the parameters, the demand can be easily forecast if data on the
independent variables for the reference period are available.

2. The Power Function. In the linear functions of demand, the marginal effects on demand of
independent variables are assumed to be constant and independent of changes in other variables. It is
assumed, for instance, that the marginal effect of a change in own price is independent of change in
income or other independent variables. There may, however, be cases in which it is intuitively or
theoretically found that the marginal effect of the independent variables on demand is neither constant
nor independent of the values of all other variables included in the demand function. For example, the
effect of an increase in the price of sugar on demand may be neutralised by a rise in consumer’s
income. In such cases, a multiplicative or ‘power’ form of the demand function, considered to be the
most logical form, is used for estimating the demand of a commodity. The power form of the
demand function is given by:
𝑄𝑋 = 𝑎𝑃𝑋 𝑏 𝑌 𝑐 𝑃𝑦 𝑑 𝐴𝑗 (5.10)

The algebraic form of multiplicative demand function can be transformed into a log- linear form for
simplicity in estimation as follows:
𝑙𝑜𝑔𝑄𝑋 = 𝑙𝑜𝑔𝑎 + 𝑏𝑙𝑜𝑔𝑃𝑋 + 𝑐𝑙𝑜𝑔𝑌 + 𝑑𝑙𝑜𝑔𝑃𝑌 + 𝑗𝑙𝑜𝑔𝐴 (5.11)
This can be estimated using the least-squares regression technique. The estimated function can easily
be used in forecasting the future demandfor the given commodity.

b. Simultaneous Equations Method


This method of demand forecasting involves the estimation of several simultaneous equations. These
equations are, generally, behavioural equations, mathematical identities, and market-clearing
equations. Demand forecasting using econometric models of simultaneous equations enables the
forecaster take into account the simultaneous interaction between dependent and independent
variables.

The simultaneous equations method is a complete and systematic approach to forecasting in


general. It uses sophisticated mathematical and statistical tools which are beyond the scope of the
present discussions. In effect, our discussions here will be restricted to the basic steps in the
application of this method of forecasting.

The first step is to develop a complete model and specify the behavioural assumptions regarding the
variables included in the model. The variables included in the model are referred to as (i) endogenous
variables, and (ii) exogenous variables.

The endogenous variables are variables whose values are determined within the model. Endogenous
variables are included in the model as dependent variables or variables to be explained by the model.
These variables are often referred to in econometrics as ‘controlled’ variables. Note that the number
of equations in the model must equal the numberof endogenous variables.
Exogenous variables are those whose values are determined outside the model. They are referred to
as inputs of the model. The purpose of a given model will determine whether a variable is
endogenous or exogenous. Exogenous variables are also looked at as ‘uncontrolled variables.

The second step is to collect the necessary data on both endogenous and exogenous variables. If you
find that data is not available, they can be generated from available primary or secondary sources.

Having developed the model, and the necessary data collected, the third step is to estimate the model
using the appropriate method, and the two- stage least-squares method to predict the values of the
exogenous variables.

Finally, the model is solved for each endogenous variable in terms of exogenous variables. By
plugging the values of exogenous variables into the equations, the objective value can be calculated
and prediction made.
The simultaneous equation method is theoretically superior to the simple regression method. The
main advantage of the method is that it is capable of capturing the influence of dependency of the
variables. The major limitation is non-availability of adequate data.

The following example illustrates the simultaneous equation method. A simple macroeconomic model
is given below:
𝑌𝑖 = 𝐶𝑖 + 𝐼𝑖 + 𝐺𝑖 + 𝑋𝑖 (5.12)
where,
𝑌𝑖 = Gross National Product (GNP)
𝐶𝑖 = Total consumptionexpenditure
𝐼𝑖 = Gross Private Investment
𝐺𝑖 = Government expenditure
𝑋𝑖 = Net Export (X – M), where X represents Export, and M, Import. Subscript t represents a
given time unit.

Equation (5.12) is an identity that can be explained with a system of simultaneous equations, such
as:
𝐶𝑡 = 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑌𝑡 (5.13)
𝐼𝑡 = 20 (5.14)
𝐺𝑡 = 10 (5.15)
𝑋𝑡 = 5 (5.16)

In the above system of equations, Yt and Ct are the endogenous variables, and It, Gt, and Xt, are
exogenous variables. Equation (5.13) is a regression equation that needs to be estimated. Equations
(5.14) to (5.16) show the values of exogenous variables determined outside the model.

Suppose you want to predict the values of Yt and Ct simultaneously, and that when you estimated
equation (5.13) you get:
𝐶𝑡 = 100 + 0.75𝑌𝑡 (5.17)
Using this equation system, we may determine the value of 𝑌𝑡 as:
𝑌𝑡 = 𝐶𝑡 + 20 + 10 + 5
𝑌𝑡 = 35
Since 𝐶𝑡 = 100 + 0.75𝑌𝑡 , by substitution, we have
𝑌𝑡 = 100 + 0.75𝑌𝑡 + 35
then, 𝑌𝑡 − 0.75𝑌𝑡 = 100 + 35
0.25𝑌𝑡 = 135
135
𝑌𝑡 = 0.25

𝑌𝑡 = 540
We now calculate the value of 𝐶𝑡
𝐶𝑡 = 100 + 0.75𝑌𝑡
𝐶𝑡 = 100 + 0.75(540)
𝐶𝑡 = 505
Thus, we confirm the value of 𝑌𝑡
𝑌𝑡 = 505 + 20 + 10 + 5
𝑌𝑡 = 540

Note that the above example of econometric model is an extremely simplified model. In actual
practice, the econometric models are generally very complex.

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise 1


Discuss the necessary steps in the application of the simultaneous equation method of forecasting.

Self-Assessment Exercise 2
An Economic Research Centre has published data on the Gross Domestic Product (GDP) and the
Demand for refrigerators as presented below:
Year 2015 2016 2017 2018 2019 2020 2021
GDP (N’ 20 22 25 27 30 33 35
billions)
Refrigerators 5 6 8 8 9 10 12
(millions

(a) Estimate the regression equation, R = a + bY


where R = refrigerators (in millions), and Y = GDP (inN’billions)
(b) Forecast the demand for refrigerators for the years 2022, 2023,and 2024, if the
Research Centre projected the GDP for 2022, 2023, and 2024 to be N50 billion, N55 billion, and
N70 billion, respectively.

5.0 Conclusion
You must have learned some useful forecasting techniques from this unit. You also learned that the
term demand forecasting simply means predicting the future demand for a product. Information
regarding future demand is essential for scheduling and planning production, acquisition of raw
materials, acquisition of finance, and advertising. Forecasting is most useful where large-scale
production is involved and production requires long gestation period.

6.0 Summary
Among the numerous techniques employed in demand forecasting, the most important of them are the
Survey and Statistical techniques. The survey techniques are used where the purpose is to make
short-run demand forecasts. This technique uses consumer surveys to collect information about their
intentions and future purchase plans. It involves:
(i) survey of potential consumers to elicit information on their intentions and plans; and, (ii) opinion
polling of experts, that is, opinion survey of market experts and sales representatives.

The statistical techniques use historical (or time-series), and cross- section data for estimating long-
term demand for a product. The techniques are found more reliable than those of the survey
techniques. They include: (i) the Trend Projection techniques; (ii) the Barometric techniques; and, (iii)
the Econometric techniques. Our discussions, however, concentrated on the Econometric techniques
as these are more superior and reliable than the Trend Projection and Barometric techniques.

7.0 References/Further Readings


Ashton, D., & Simister, L. eds. (1970). The Role of forecasting in Corporate Planning, Staples Press,
London.
Brigham, E., & Pappas, L. J. (1976). Managerial Economics, The Dryden Press, Hinsdale, Illinois.
Haessuler, E. F. & Paul, R. S. (1976). Introductory Mathematical Analysis for Students of Business
and Economics, 2nd edition (Reston Virginia: Reston Publishing Company)
Reddy, M. J., (1981). Demand Forecasting, Light and Life Publication, New Delhi.
Wolfe, H. D. (1966). Business Forecasting Methods, Holt, Rinehart and Winston, Inc.

Self-Assessment Exercise Answer 1


1. Steps in the application of the simultaneous equation method of forecasting.

Step 1: Develop a complete model and specify the behavioural assumptions regarding the variables included
in the model. The variables included in the model are referred to as (i) endogenous variables, and (ii)
exogenous variables.
Endogenous variables are variables whose values are determined within the model. Endogenous
variables are included in the model as dependent variables or variables to be explained by the model.
These variables are often referred to in econometrics as ‘controlled’ variables. Note that the number
of equations in the model must equal the numberof endogenous variables.
Exogenous variables are those whose values are determined outside the model. They are referred to as
inputs of the model. The purpose of a given model will determine whether a variable is endogenous
or exogenous. Exogenous variables are also looked at as ‘uncontrolled variables.

Step 2: Collect the necessary data on both endogenous and exogenous variables. If you find that data
is not available, they can be generated from available primary or secondary sources.

Step 3: Estimate the model using the appropriate method, and the two- stage least-squares method to
predict the values of the exogenous variables.

Step 4: Solved for each endogenous variable in terms of exogenous variables. By plugging the
values of exogenous variables into the equations, the objective value can be calculated and
prediction made.

Self-Assessment Exercise Answer 2

Year Y R Y2 YR
2015 20 5 400 100
2016 22 6 484 132
2017 25 8 625 200
2018 27 8 729 216
2019 30 9 900 270
2020 33 10 1089 330
2021 35 12 1225 420
∑𝑌 = ∑ 𝑅 = ∑ 𝑌2 = ∑ 𝑌𝑅 =
192 58 5452 1668

∑ 𝑌 = 𝑛𝑎 + 𝑏 ∑ 𝑋
∑ 𝑋𝑌 = 𝑎 ∑ 𝑥 + 𝑏 ∑ 𝑋 2
𝑋=𝑌
𝑌=𝑅
Therefore, we have:
∑ 𝑅 = 𝑛𝑎 + 𝑏 ∑ 𝑌
∑ 𝑌𝑅 = 𝑎 ∑ 𝑦 + 𝑏 ∑ 𝑌 2
58 = 7𝑎 + 192𝑏 × 192
1668 = 192𝑎 + 5452𝑏 × 7
11136 = 1344𝑎 + 36864𝑏
11676 = 1344𝑎 + 38164𝑏
_________________________________
540 = 1300b
b = 0.42
From equation 1, solve for a
58 = 7𝑎 + 192𝑏
58 = 7𝑎 + 192(0.42)
58 = 7𝑎 + 80.64
58 − 80.64 = 7𝑎
−22.64 = 7𝑎
𝑎 = −3.23
(a)
𝑅 = 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑌
𝑅 = −3.23 + (0.42)𝑌
2022 = 50
𝑅 = −3.23 + (0.42)(50)
= −3.23 + 21
𝑅 = 17.77 Units
2023 = 55
𝑅 = −3.23 + (0.42)(55)
= −3.23 + 23.1
𝑅 = 19.87 Units
2024 = 70
𝑅 = −3.23 + (0.42)(70)
= −3.23 + 29.4
𝑅 = 26.17 Units
Module : 4 Production and Cost Analysis

This module looks at the production and cost analysis which is very important aspect of business. The
module is comprised of 5 units which include theory of production; degrees of production functions,
economies of scale, returns and optimal input combinations; theory of cost; cost-output relations and
long-run cost-output relations and break-even analysis.

Unit 1: Theory of Production


Unit 2: Degrees of Production Functions, Economies of Scale, Returns and Optimal Input
Combinations
Unit 3: Theory of Cost
Unit 4: Cost-Output Relations
Unit 5: Long-Run Cost-Output Relations and Break-Even Analysis

UNIT 1: THEORY OF PRODUCTION


Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Theory of Production
3.1 Production Concepts
3.2 Stages of Production
3.3 Law of Variable Proportion or Diminishing Returns
3.4 Production Function
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings
1.0 Introduction
No matter the objective of any business organisation, achievement of efficiency in production or cost
minimisation for a given production activity appear to be one of the prime concern of the managers.
As a matter of fact, the survival of a business firm in a competitive environment depends on its
ability to produce at competitive costs. Firms are, therefore, mandated to either minimise costs of
production or maximise output from a given quantity of inputs. In the manager’s effort to minimise
production costs, the fundamental questions he or she faces are:
a. How can production be optimized or costs minimised?
b. What will be the beaviour of output as inputs increase?
c. How does technology help in reducing production costs?
d. How can the least-cost combination of inputs be achieved?
f. Given the technology, what happens to the rate of return when more plants are added to the
firm?

The theory of production attempts to provide theoretical answers to these questions, through
abstract models built under hypothetical conditions. It follows that, though production theories may
not provide solutions to the real life business problems, it can provide tools and techniques for the
analysis of production conditions and for finding solutions to the practical business problems.

In this unit, we present the theory of production. In unit 2, the discussions will be extended to other
important aspects of production, including economies of scale and optimal input combinations.

2.0 Learning Outcomes


At the end of this unit, should be able to:
i. Understand the relationships between production and the factorsof production
ii. Provide answers to the fundamental questions managers ask themselves in their efforts to
minimise costs of production.
iii. Understand the basic forms of production functions
iv. Make efficient production decisions
3.0 Theory of Production
Production in economics means the process by which an input is transformed into an output. That is
the transformation of raw materials into finished goods. Production therefore is the creation of goods
and services to satisfy human wants. Production theory generally deals with quantitative relationships,
that is, technical and technological relationships between inputs, especially labour and capital, and
between inputs and outputs.

An input is a good or service that goes into the production process. As economists refer to it, an input
is simply anything which a firm buys for use in its production process. An output, on the other hand,
is any good or service that comes out of a production process.

Economists classified inputs as (i) labour; (ii) capital; (iii) land; (iv) raw materials; and, (v) time.
These variables are measured per unit of time and hence referred to as flow variables. In recent times,
entrepreneurship has been added as part of the production inputs, though this can be measured by the
managerial expertise and the ability to make things happen. Inputs are classified as either fixed or
variable inputs. Fixed and variable inputs are defined in both economic sense and technical sense.
In economic sense, a fixed input is one whose supply is inelastic in the short run. In technical sense, a
fixed input is one that remains fixed (or constant) for certain level of output.

A variable input is one whose supply in the short run is elastic, example, labour, raw materials, and
the like. Users of such inputs can employ a larger quantity in the short run. Technically, a variable
input is one that changes with changes in output. In the long run, all inputs are variable.

3.1 Production Concepts


1. Total Product (TP)
Total product is the total output generated by the firm per unit of time. TP varies directly with
increase in variable input (labour) unit.
TP

Q = f(L)

0 Labour
Figure: 1.1: Total Product

𝑇𝑃
2. Average Product: Average product is the output per unit of variable input (labour). 𝐴𝑃 = 𝐿

AP

AP

0 L
Figure: 1.2: Average Product

3. Marginal Product (MP): Marginal Product is the addition to total product brought about by a
unit of increase in one variable input (factor).
∆𝑇𝑃 𝜕𝑇𝑃
𝑀𝑃 = 𝑜𝑟
∆𝐿 𝜕𝐿
MP

0 L
MP
Figure: 1.3: Average Product

Table 1.1: Total, Average and Marginal Products of Labour


Input Total Average Marginal
(L) Product (TP) Product (AP) Product (MP)
1 10 10 -
2 22 11 12
3 36 12 14
4 56 14 10
5 70 14 14
6 84 14 14
7 96 13.7 12
8 97 12.1 1
9 97 10.8 0
10 95 9.5 -2

TP
AP
MP
I II TP

III

AP

0 L

MP
Figure: 1.4: The relationship between Total, Average and Marginal Products

From the diagram above, we can note:


i. That TP is a maximum than MP is zero
ii. That when TP is declining/fall, MP is negative
iii. That MP is always rising faster than AP
iv. That when AP is sat Maximum, MP = AP
v. when MP is falling, AP is falling above it.

3.2 Stages of Production


The relationship between APL and MPL curves can be sued to illustrate the three stages of production
for labour. Stage I goes from the origin to the point where the APL is maximum. Stage II goes from
where the APL is maximum to the point where MP is zero. Stage III covers the range over which the
MPL is negative. A rational producer will not operate in stage III where the contribution of additional
worker is negative. Similarly, a rational producer will not be found operating in stage I because of the
fixed factor has not been used maximally, but a rational producer will produce at stage II where MP is
falling and the law of diminishing marginal returns is established.

3.3 Law of Variable Proportion or Diminishing Returns


When some factors are held constant (i.e. fixed) while one factor is increased (variable), a point will
be reached when marginal, average and total products will diminish. that is as input increases output
reduces.

The law of various proportion is concerned with:


a. A case of single variable input variation
b. It is concerned with short period production function
c. It takes technology of production to be constant
d. All units variable inputs are homogeneous.
If all factors of production are fixed and a factor is varied (labour) production may increase or
decrease as follows:
1. For a given proportionate change in quantity of varied input, the output may increase more
than proportionately. If 10 percent increase in labour input yield 15 percent increase in output, this is
a case of increase return.
2. The output may increase equi - proportionately with increase in variable inputs of 10%
increase in labour input gives to 10% increase output, this is a case of constant return.
3. Output may increase less than proportionately with increase in variable unit. If 10% increase
in labour yield 8% to total output, this is a case of diminishing returns and it corresponding stage II. A
rational producer will be found operating when the law of diminishing return operates. This is the
point of greater average efficiency for variable input (labour) and the producer will produce at the
beginning of stage II where AP is maximum and the MP is equal to AP at the end of stage II, where
MP equate zero.

3.4 Production Function


Production function is a tool of analysis used in explaining the input- output relationship. It describes
the technical relationship between inputs and output in physical terms. In its general form, it holds
that production of a given commodity depends on certain specific inputs. In its specific form, it
presents the quantitative relationships between inputs and outputs. A production function may take the
form of a schedule, a graph line or a curve, an algebraic equation or a mathematical model. The
production function represents the technology of a firm.

An empirical production function is generally so complex to include a wide range of inputs: land,
labour, capital, raw materials, time, and technology. These variables form the independent variables
in a firm’s actual production function. A firm’s long-run production function is of the form:
𝑄 = 𝑑(𝐿𝑑 , 𝐿, 𝐾, 𝑀, 𝑇, 𝑡) (1.1)
where Ld = land and building; L = labour; K = capital; M = materials; T = technology;and, t = time.

For sake of convenience, economists have reduced the number of variables used in a production
function to only two: capital (K) and labour (L). Therefore, in the analysis of input-output relations,
the production function is expressed as:
𝑄 = 𝑓(𝐾, 𝐿) (1.2)
Equation (1.2) represents the algebraic or mathematical form of the production function. It is this
form of production function which is most commonly used in production analysis.

As implied by the production function in equation (1.2), increasing production, Q, will require K and
L, and whether the firm can increase both K and L or only L will depend on the time period it takes
into account for increasing production, that is, whether the firm is thinking in terms of the short run or
in terms of the long run. Economists believe that the supply of capital (K) is inelastic in the short run
and elastic in the long run. Thus, in the short run firms can increase production only by increasing
labour, since the supply of capital is fixed in the short run. In the long run, the firm can employ
more of both capital and labour, as the supply of capital becomes elastic over time. In effect, there
exists two types of production functions:

The short-run production function; and, the long-run production function..


The Short- and Long-Run Production Functions:

The short-run production function, often referred to as the single variable production function, can be
written as:
𝑄 = 𝑓(𝐿) (1.3)
Example
Given a hypothetical production function in the short run as:
𝑄 = −𝐿3 + 15𝐿2 + 10𝐿
i. What is the level of output if 5units of labour is used?
ii. Determine the AP and MP.
Solution:
𝑄 = −𝐿3 + 15𝐿2 + 10𝐿
𝑄 = −(5)3 + 15(5)2 + 10(5)
𝑄 = −12 + 375 + 50
𝑄 = 300

𝑇𝑃 𝑄
ii. 𝐴𝑃 = =
𝐿 𝐿
𝑄 −𝐿3 +15𝐿2 +10𝐿
𝐴𝑃 = =
𝐿 𝐿
−𝐿3 15𝐿2 10𝐿
= + +
𝐿 𝐿 𝐿

𝐴𝑃 = −𝐿2 + 15𝐿 + 10 (1.4)


𝜕𝑇𝑃 𝜕𝑄
𝑀𝑃 = =
𝜕𝐿 𝜕𝐿
𝜕𝑄 𝜕(−𝐿3 +15𝐿2 +10𝐿)
= =
𝜕𝐿 𝜕𝐿
2
𝑀𝑃 = −3𝐿 + 20𝐿 + 10 (1.5)

In the long-run, both capital (K) and labour (L) is included in the production function in equation
(1.2), so that the long-run production function can be written as:
𝑄 = 𝑓(𝐾, 𝐿)
A production function is based on the following assumptions:
i. perfect divisibility of both inputs and output;
ii. there are only two factors of production – capital (K) and labour(L);
iii. limited substitution of one factor for the other; (iv) a giventechnology; and,
iv. inelastic supply of fixed factors in the short-run.

Any changes in the above assumptions would require modifications inthe production function.
The two most important forms of production functions used in economic literature in analysing input-
output relationships are the Cobb-Douglas production function and the Constant Elasticity of
Substitution (CES) production function. Our interest at this level will be limited to the Cobb-Douglas
production function.

Cobb-Douglas Production Function


The Cobb-Douglas production function is of the following general form:
𝑄 = 𝐴𝐾 𝑎 𝐿𝑏 (1.6)
𝑎+𝑏 =1
where a and b are positive fractions.
The Cobb-Douglas production function is often used in its followingform:
𝑄 = 𝐴𝐾 𝑎 𝐿1−𝑎 (1.7)
Properties of the Cobb-Douglas Production Function
A power function of the Cobb-Douglas type has the following important properties:
First, the multiplicative form of the power function in equation (1.6) can be transformed into its log-
linear form as:
log 𝑄 = 𝐿𝑜𝑔 𝐴 + 𝑎 𝑙𝑜𝑔 𝐾 + 𝑏 log 𝐿 (1.8)
In its logarithmic form, the function becomes simple to handle and can be empirically estimated
using linear regression techniques.

Second, power functions are homogeneous and the degree of homogeneity is given by the sum of the
exponents a and b as in the Cobb-Douglas function. If 𝑎 + 𝑏 = 1, then the production function is
homogeneous of degree 1 and implies constant returns to scale.

Third, a and b represent the elasticity coefficient of output for inputs, K and L, respectively. The
output elasticity coefficient (ε) in respect of capital can be defined as proportional change in output as
a result of a given change in K, keeping L constant. Thus,
𝜕𝑄⁄
𝑄 𝜕𝑄 𝐾
𝜀𝐾 = 𝜕𝑄 = 𝜕𝐾 × 𝑄 (1.9)
⁄𝐾

By differentiating the production function, 𝑄 = 𝐴𝐾 𝑎 𝐿𝑏 , with respect to K and substituting the result
into equation (13.9), the elasticity coefficient, 𝜀𝐾 , can be derived:
𝜕𝑄
= 𝑎𝐴𝐾 𝑎−1 𝐿𝑏
𝜕𝐾

Substituting the values for Q and ∂Q/∂K into equation (1.9), you get:
𝐾
𝜀𝐾 = 𝑎𝐴𝐾 𝑎−1 𝐿𝑏 (𝐴𝐾𝑎 𝐿𝑏 ) = 𝑎

It follows that the output coefficient for capital, K, is ‘a’. The same procedure may be applied to show
that ‘b’ is the elasticity coefficient of output for labour, L.

Fourth, the constants a and b represent the relative distributive share of inputs K and L in the total
output, Q. The share of K in Q is given by:
𝜕𝑄
×𝐾
𝜕𝐾

Similarly, the share of L in Q can be obtained by:


𝜕𝑄
×𝐿
𝜕𝐾

The relative share of K in Q can be obtained as:


𝜕𝑄 1 𝑎𝐴𝐾𝑎−1 𝐿𝑏 ×𝐾
×𝐾×𝑄 = =𝑎 (1.10)
𝜕𝐾 𝑄=𝐴𝐾𝑎 𝐿𝑏

Similarly, the relative share of L in Q can be obtained as:


𝜕𝑄 1 𝑎𝐴𝐾𝑎−1 𝐿𝑏 ×𝐿
×𝐿× = =𝑏
𝜕𝐿 𝑄 𝑄=𝐴𝐾𝑎 𝐿𝑏

Finally, the Cobb-Douglas production function in its general form, 𝑄 = 𝐴𝐾 𝑎 𝐿1−𝑎 , implies that at zero
cost, there will be zero production.

Some of the necessary concepts in production analysis can be easilyderived from the
Cobb-Douglas production function as shown below:
1. Average Products of L (𝐴𝑃𝐿 ) and K (𝐴𝑃𝐾 ):
𝑄
𝐴𝑃𝐿 = 𝐿
𝑄
𝐴𝑃𝐾 = 𝐾

2. Marginal Products of L (𝑀𝑃𝐿 ) and K (𝑀𝑃𝐾 ):


𝜕𝑄
𝑀𝑃𝐿 = = 𝑏𝐴𝐾 𝑎 𝐿𝑏−1
𝜕𝐿
𝜕𝑄
𝑀𝑃𝐾 = = 𝑎𝐴𝐾 𝑎−1 𝐿𝑏
𝜕𝐾

𝑄
𝑀𝑃𝐿 = 𝑏( ⁄𝐿)
𝑄
𝑀𝑃𝐾 = 1 − 𝑎( ⁄𝐾 )
3. Marginal Rate of Technical Substitution of L for K (𝑀𝑅𝑇𝑆𝐿𝐾 )
𝑀𝑃
𝑀𝑅𝑇𝑆𝐿𝐾 = 𝑀𝑃 𝐿
𝐾

𝑀𝑃𝐾
𝑀𝑅𝑇𝑆𝐾𝐿 = 𝑀𝑃𝐿

Note the 𝑀𝑅𝑇𝑆𝐿𝐾 is the rate at which a marginal unit of labour, L, can be substituted for a
marginal unit of capital, K (along a given isoquant) without affecting the total output.

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise 1


1. Define production.
2. Name the factors of production and their rewards.
Self-Assessment Exercise 2
With mathematical symbols, define the concepts of production.

Self-Assessment Exercise 3
With graphical illustration, discuss the stages of production.

Self-Assessment Exercise 4
Given the Cobb-Douglas production function:
𝑄 = 50𝐾 0.2 𝐿0.8
i. Derive 𝐴𝑃𝐿 , 𝐴𝑃𝐾 , 𝑀𝑃𝐿 , 𝑀𝑃𝐾
ii. 𝑀𝑅𝑇𝑆𝐿𝐾 and 𝑀𝑅𝑇𝑆𝐾𝐿

5.0 Conclusion
This unit points out that production theory deals with quantitative relationships, otherwise known as
technical and technological relationships between inputs, especially labour and capital, and between
inputs and outputs.

An input has been defined as a good or service that goes into the production process. In economic
terms, an input is simply anything which a firm buys for use in its production process. An output, on
the other hand, is any good or service that comes out of a production process.

Economists classified inputs as (i) labour; (ii) capital; (iii) land; (iv) raw materials; and, (v) time.
These variables are measured per unit of time and hence referred to as flow variables. In recent times,
entrepreneurship has been added as part of the production inputs, though this can be measured by the
managerial expertise and the ability to make things happen.

The unit discusses two major forms of production functions: (i) the short-and long-run production
functions; and, (ii) the Cobb-Douglas production function.

6.0 Summary
The unit notes that production function is a tool of analysis used in explaining the input- output
relationship. It describes the technical relationship between inputs and output in physical terms. It
suggests that production of a given commodity depends on certain specific inputs. A production
function may take the form of a schedule, a graph line or a curve, an algebraic equation or a
mathematical model. The production function represents the technology of a firm.

An empirical production function is generally so complex to include a wide range of inputs: land,
labour, capital, raw materials, time, and technology. These variables form the independent variables
in a firm’s actual production function. A firm’s long-run production function is of the form:

A production function is based on the following assumptions:


(i) perfect divisibility of both inputs and output;
(ii) there are only two factors of production – capital (K) and lacour (L);
(iii) limited substitution of one factor for the other;
(iv) a given technology; and,
(v) inelastic supply of fixed factors in the short-run.

The two most important forms of production functions used in economic literature in analysing input-
output relationships are the Cobb-Douglas production function and the Constant Elasticity of
Substitution (CES) production function. The unit however, focused on the Cobb-Douglas form of
production function. The Cobb-Douglas production function isof the following general form:
𝑄 = 𝐴𝐾 𝑎 𝐿𝑏
where a and b are positive fractions.

The Cobb-Douglas production function is often used in its followingform:


𝑄 = 𝐴𝐾 𝑎 𝐿1−𝑎
Four important properties of the Cobb-Douglas production function was discussed in detail in the
unit. One of which is that the powers a and b in the above production function (the first equation)
represent the elasticity coefficient of output for K and L respectively.

7.0 References/Further Readings


Baumol, W. J. (1985). Economic Theory and operations Analysis, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi
Bilas, R. A. (1971). Microeconomic Theory, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Boulding. K. E. (1966). Economics Analysis: Microeconomics, 4th Edition, New York Harper and
Row.
Douglas, E. J. (1983). Managerial Economics: Theory and Practice and problems, Prentice-Hall Inc.,
New Jersey. 2nd edition.
Ferguson, C. E. (1972). Microeconomic Theory, 3rd Edition, Illnois, Richard D. Irwin, Inc.
Haessuler, E. F. & Paul, R. S. (1976). Introductory Mathematical Analysis for Students of Business
and Economics, 2nd edition (Reston Virginia: Reston Publishing Company)
Hirshleifer, J. (1987). Price Theory and Application, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.

Nicholson, W. (1975). Intermediate Microeconomics and Its Application, Dryden Press, Hindale.
Webb, S. C. (1976). Managerial Economics, Houghton Mifflin, Boston.

Self-Assessment Exercise 1 Answer


1. Production is the process by which an input is transformed into an output. That is the
transformation of raw materials into finished goods. Production therefore is the creation of goods and
services to satisfy human wants.

2. The factors of production and their rewards are.


The factors of production are:
i. Land: the reward for land is rent
ii. Capital: the reward for capital is interest
iii. Labor or human capital: the reward for labour is wages
iv. Entrepreneurship: the reward for entrepreneurship is profit.
Self-Assessment Exercise 2 Answer
1. Total Product (TP)
Total product is the total output generated by the firm per unit of time. TP varies directly with
increase in variable input (labour) unit.
2. Average Product: Average product is the output per unit of variable input (labour).
𝑇𝑃
𝐴𝑃 =
𝐿
3. Marginal Product (MP): Marginal Product is the addition to total product brought about by a unit of
increase in one variable input (factor).
∆𝑇𝑃 𝜕𝑇𝑃
𝑀𝑃 = 𝑜𝑟
∆𝐿 𝜕𝐿

Self-Assessment Exercise 3 Answer

TP
AP
MP
I II TP

III

AP

0 L

MP
The relationship between APL and MPL curves can be sued to illustrate the three stages of production
for labour. Stage I goes from the origin to the point where the APL is maximum. Stage II goes from
where the APL is maximum to the point where MP is zero. Stage III covers the range over which the
MPL is negative.
• The First Stage of production is depicted by a positive slope of the average product curve,
ceasing at the intersection between the average product and marginal product curves. In stage one, the
average product is positive and continues to increase.
• The Second Stage of production continues up to the point where the marginal product will
become negative, at the peak of the total product curve. In stage two, the marginal product is positive
but keeps on diminishing
• The Third Stage of production prevails over the range where the total product curve is
negatively sloped and in Stage three total product is diminishing.

Self-Assessment Exercise 4 Answer


𝑄 = 50𝐾 0.2 𝐿0.8
𝑄
𝐴𝑃𝐿 = 𝐿
50𝐾0.2 𝐿0.8
𝐴𝑃𝐿 = 𝐿
𝑄
𝐴𝑃𝐾 = 𝐾
50𝐾0.2 𝐿0.8
𝐴𝑃𝐾 = 𝐾
𝛿𝑄
𝑀𝑃𝐿 = 𝛿𝐿
𝛿(50𝐾0.2 𝐿0.8 )
= 𝛿𝐾

= 0.2(50𝐾 0.2−1 𝐿0.8 )


0.2(50𝐾0.2 𝐿0.8 )
= 𝐾
0.2𝑄
𝑀𝑃𝐾 = 𝐾
𝛿𝑄
𝑀𝑃𝐿 = 𝛿𝐿
𝛿(50𝐾0.2 𝐿0.8 )
= 𝛿𝐿

0.8(50𝐾 0.2 𝐿0.8−1 )


0.8(50𝐾0.2 𝐿0.8 )
𝐿
0.8𝑄
𝑀𝑃𝐿 = 𝐿
𝑀𝑃
𝑀𝑅𝑇𝑆𝐿𝐾 = 𝑀𝑃 𝐿
𝐾
𝑄
0.8 ⁄𝐿
= 𝑄
0.2 ⁄𝐾

0.8𝐾
𝑀𝑅𝑇𝑆𝐿𝐾 = 0.2𝐿
𝑀𝑃𝐾
𝑀𝑅𝑇𝑆𝐾𝐿 = 𝑀𝑃𝐿
𝑄
0.2 ⁄𝐾
= 𝑄
0.8 ⁄𝐿

0.2𝐿
𝑀𝑅𝑇𝑆𝐾𝐿 = 0.8𝐾
UNIT 2: DEGREES OF PRODUCTION FUNCTIONS AND RETURNS OF SCALE,
ECONOMIES OF SCALE AND OPTIMAL INPUT COMBINATIONS
Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Degrees of Production Function and Returns to Scale, Economies of Scale and Optimal Input
Combinations
3.1 Degree of Production Functions and Returns to Scale
3.2 Economies and Diseconomies of Scale
3.3 Optimal Input Combinations
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
This unit discusses four important production concepts that a manager must know in order to be in the
hem of affairs in any production decision. As the unit title indicates, these concepts include: (i)
degrees of production functions; (ii) economies of scale in production; (iii) returns to scale; and, (iv)
optimal input combinations.

2.0 Learning Outcomes


Having gone through this unit, you should be able to:
i. Be more informed on the issues involving production decisionsthan ever.
ii. Make efficient and effective.
iii. Understand the managerial implications of economies anddiseconomies of scale in production.

3.0 Degrees of Production Function and Returns to Scale, Economies of Scale, and
Optimal Input Combinations
3.1 Degree of Production Functions and Returns to Scale
The famous laws of returns to scale can be explained through production functions. Assume generally
a production functions involving two variables capital (K) and labour (L), and one commodity, X.
The production function may be expressed in the form:
𝑄𝑋 = 𝑓(𝐾, 𝐿) (2.1)

Qx denotes the quantity produced of commodity X. Assume also that the production function is
homogeneous, that is, when all inputs are increased in the same proportion, the proportion can be
factored out mathematically. If when all inputs are increased by a certain proportion (say, k) and
output increases by the same proportion (k), the production function is said to be homogeneous of
degree 1. A production functionof homogeneous of degree 1 is expressed as follows:
𝑘𝑄𝑋 = 𝑓(𝑘𝐾, 𝑘𝐿) (2.2)
= 𝑘𝑓(𝐾, 𝐿)

A homogeneous production function of degree 1 implies constant returns to scale. Equation (2.2)
indicates that increases in the inputs K and L by a multiple of k, will increase output, Qx, by the
same multiple, k, implying constant returns to scale.

Note that increasing inputs, say K and L in the same proportion may result in increasing or
diminishing returns to scale. Simply stated, it is likely that increases in all the inputs in certain
proportion may not result in increase in output in the same proportion. If all the inputs are doubled,
for example, output may not be doubled, it may increase by less than or more than double. In this
case, the production function can be expressed as:
ℎ𝑄𝑋 = 𝑓(𝑘𝐾, 𝑘𝐿) (2.3)

where h denotes h-times increase in output, Qx, as a result of k-times increase in inputs, K and L.
The proportion, h may be greater than k,equal to k, or less than k. This touches on the three laws of
returns to scale:
i. If h = k, production function reveals constant returns to scale
ii. If h > k, production function reveals increasing returns to scale
iii. If h < k, the production function reveals decreasing returns to scale.

Observe that in the production function, equation (2.2), k has an exponent equal to 1 (that is, k = k1),
hence, it is of homogeneous of degree 1. In general, the exponent of k can take the letter r, where r ≠
1. A production function is therefore, said to be homogeneous of degree r when if all the inputs are
multiplied by k, output increases by a multipleof Kr. That is, if,
𝑓(𝑘𝐾, 𝑘𝐿) = 𝑘 𝑟 (𝐾, 𝐿) = 𝑘 𝑟 𝑄 (2.4)

then the production function in equation (2.4) is homogeneousof degree r.


From this production function, the laws of returns to scale can again be derived as follows:
(i) If k > 1, and r < 1, production function reveals decreasing returns to scale
(ii) (ii) If k > 1, and r > 1, production function reveals increasing returns to scale
(iii) (iii) If k > 1, and r = 1, production function reveals constant returns to scale.

Consider the following multiplicative form of a production function:


𝑄 = 𝐾 0.25 𝐿0.50 (2.5)
If K and L are multiplied by k, and output increases by a multiple of h, then
ℎ𝑄 = (𝑘𝐾)0.25 (𝑘𝐿)0.50

factoring out k, you get:


ℎ𝑄 = 𝑘 0.25+0.50 [𝐾 0.25 𝐿0.50 ]
= 𝑘 0.75 [𝐾 0.25 𝐿0.50 ] (2.6)

According to equation (2.6), ℎ = 𝑘 0.75 and 𝑟 = 0.75, implying that r < 1, and, h < k. It follows that
the production function in equation (2.5) shows decreasing returns to scale.

Consider another production function of the form:


𝑄 = 𝑓(𝐾, 𝐿, 𝑋) = 𝐾 0.75 𝐿1.25 𝑋 0.50 (2.7)
Multiplying K, L, and X by k, Q increases by a multiple of h:
ℎ𝑄 = (𝑘𝐾)0.75 (𝑘𝐿)1.25 (𝑘𝑋)0.50
Again factoring out k, you get:
ℎ𝑄 = 𝑘 0.75+1.25+0.50 [𝐾 0.75 𝐿1.25 𝑋 0.50 ]
= 𝑘 2.5 [𝐾 0.75 𝐿1.25 𝑋 0.50 ]

Observe that in this case, ℎ = 𝑘 2.5 and 𝑟 = 2.5, so that h > k. Thus, production function in equation
(2.7) depicts increasing returns to scale.

3.2 Economies and Diseconomies of Scale


It can be shown that long-run average cost decreases with the expansion of production scale up to a
certain optimum level, and then begins to rise. This behaviour of the long- run average cost is cost
by the economies and diseconomies of scale. Economies of scale give rise to cost savings, while
diseconomies of scale lead to cost increases. Economies and diseconomies of scale determine also
the returns to scale in production. Increasing returns to scale operates until economies of scale are
greater than the economies of scale. When economies of scale and diseconomies of scale are in
balance, returns to scale are constant. In the discussions that follow, we examine the various kinds
of economies and diseconomies of scale.

3.2.1 Economies of Scale


Economies of scale are of two different categories:
i. Internal or Real economies; and,
ii. External or Pecuniary Economies.

i. Internal Economies: Internal or ‘real economies’ arise from the expansion of the plant size of the
firm and are internalized. This implies that internal economies are exclusively available to the
expanding firm. Internal economies are often classified under the categories:
a. Economies in production;
b. Economies in marketing;
c. Managerial economies; and,
d. Economies in transport and storage.

Economies in Production: Economies in production arise from two basic sources:


a. technological advantages; and,
b. advantages of division of labour and specialization.

Economies in Marketing: Economies in marketing arise from large-scale purchase of raw materials
and other material inputs, as well as large- scale selling of the firm’s own products. Economies in
marketing the firm’s own product are associated with:
a. economies in advertisement cost;
b. economies in large-scale distribution through wholesalers; and
c. other large- scale economies.

Managerial Economies: These arise from (a) specialization in management; and, (b) mechanization of
managerial functions.
Economies in Transport and Storage costs arise from full utilization of transport and storage facilities.

ii. External or Pecuniary Economies of Scale: This kind of economies of scale accrues to the
expanding firms from the advantages arising outside the firm, from the input market, for
example. Pecuniary economies accrue to the large-size firms in the form of discounts and
concessions on: (i) large-scale purchase of raw materials; (ii) large-scale acquisition of external
finance; (iii) massive advertisement campaigns; (iv) large-scale hiring of means of transport and
warehouse, and the like.

3.2.2 Diseconomies of Scale


Diseconomies of scale represent disadvantages that arise due to the expansion of scale of production,
leading to a rise in production cost. This may be internal or external.

i. Internal Diseconomies of Scale: Economies of scale has some limit, which is reached when the
advantages of division of labour and managerial staff have been fully exploited; excess plant capacity;
excess warehouse capacity; excess transport and communication capacity, and the like.
(ii) External Diseconomies of Scale: These are the disadvantages that originate outside the firm: in
the input markets, and due to natural constraints, especially in agriculture and extractive industries.
With the expansion of the industry, for example, the discounts and concessions that are available on
bulk purchases of inputs, as well as concessions on finance will eventually come to an end.
Increasing demand for inputs also put pressure on the input markets leading to increase in input prices
that will further lead to rises in production costs.

3.3 Optimal Input Combinations


Economists are of the opinion that profit-maximising firms seek to minimise costs for a given level
of output, or to maximise its output for a given total cost. The two major instruments in the
maximisation of output are the isoquants curves and isocost line, often referred to as the budget
constraint line. The logic of isoquant tells you that a given level of output can be produced with
different input combinations. Given the input prices, however, only one of the input combinations
would be the least cost combination. The least-cost combination represents the input combination for
which the budget constraint line is tangent to the isoquant curve. This is the point for which the
slope of the budget constraint line equals the slope of the isoquant curve.
Given the inputs, K and L, the first order condition in physical terms requires the marginal rate of
exchanges (MRE) between K and L must equal the ratio of their marginal physical product (MPP),
i.e.,
−∆𝐾 𝑀𝑃
= 𝑀𝑃 𝐿 (2.8)
∆𝐿 𝐾

Where ∆𝐾⁄∆𝐿is the marginal rate of exchanges (MRE) between K and L, and 𝑀𝑃𝐿 and 𝑀𝑃𝐾 is the
ratio of marginal productivity of L and K.
𝑀𝑃𝐿
In equation (2.8), − ∆𝐾⁄∆𝐿= slope of the isocost, and ⁄𝑀𝑃 = slope of the isoquants. It implies
𝐾

that the least-cost combination exists at a point where isoquant is tangent to isocost. The least-cost
combination of K and L is graphically shown in figure 2.1. The isoquant I2 = 200 is tanget to iscost,
K2L2 at the point P. At the point, the combination of K and L equals OM of K plus ON of L. This
−∆𝐾 𝑀𝑃
combination of K and L is optima as t satisfies the least-cost criterion, that, = 𝑀𝑃 𝐿
∆𝐿 𝐾
Figure 2.1: Least-Cost Combination of Inputs

The first order criterion of the least-cost input-combination is also expressed in physical terms that
the marginal physical product ratio of K and L must equal their price ratio. This condition can be
written as:
𝑀𝑃𝐿 𝑃
= 𝑃𝐿
𝑀𝑃𝐾 𝐾

𝑀𝑃𝐿 𝑀𝑃𝐾
= (2.9)
𝑃𝐿 𝑃𝐾

Where 𝑀𝑃𝐿 and 𝑀𝑃𝐾 are marginal products of labour and capital respectively, and 𝑃𝐿 and 𝑃𝐾 are
prices o labour and capital respectively.
The second order condition requires that the first order condition is satisfied also on the points A and
D, the points of intersection between Q1 = 100 and K2L2 in figure 2.1, as at these intersection points:
−∆𝐾 𝑀𝑃
= 𝑀𝑃 𝐿 .
∆𝐿 𝐾

But points A and D are not on the highest possible isoquant. Therefore, these points do not satisfy the
second order condition. The second order condition is satisfied at point P. It can be seen in figure 2.1
that points, A, D and P satisfy the first order condition but point P only satisfies the second order
condition. Thus, both first and second order conditions are satisfied in point P. Therefore, point P
determines the optimum input combination or least-cost combination of inputs.

The above least-cost criterion can be translated in values terms by multiplying the marginal
productivities of capital (𝑀𝑃𝐾 ) and marginal productivities of capital (𝑀𝑃𝐾 ) each by product price
(P) to obtain the marginal revenue product of labour (𝑀𝑅𝑃𝐿 ) and marginal revenue product of labour
(𝑀𝑅𝑃𝐾 ), and taking ratios to get:
𝑀𝑃𝐿 ×𝑃 𝑀𝑅𝑃
= 𝑀𝑅𝑃 𝐿 (2.10)
𝑀𝑃𝐾 ×𝑃 𝐾

Equation (2.10) can be related to the ratio of inputs prices as follows:


𝑃𝐿 𝑀𝑅𝑃
= 𝑀𝑅𝑃 𝐿
𝑃𝐾 𝐾

𝑀𝑅𝑃𝐿 𝑀𝑅𝑃𝐾
= (2.11)
𝑃𝐿 𝑃𝐾

It can be inferred from equation (2.11) that least-cost or optimum input combination requires that the
marginal revenue productivity ratio of factors should be equal to their price ratios, or that the marginal
revenue productivity and factor price ratios of all the inputs must be equal.

3.3.1 Effect of Changes in Input Prices on the Optimal Combination of Inputs


Changes in input prices affect the optimal combination of inputs at different magnitudes, depending
on the nature of input price change. If all input prices change in the same proportion, the relative
prices ofinputs (that is the slope of the budget constraint or isocost line) remain unaffected. But when
input prices change at different rates in the same direction, or change at different rates in the
opposite direction, or price of only one input changes while the prices of other inputs remain
constant, the relative prices of the inputs will change. This change in relative input-prices changes
both the input- combinations and the level of output. The change in input-combinations is as a result
of the substitution effect of change in relative prices of inputs. A change in relative prices of inputs
would imply that some inputs have become cheaper in relation to others. Cost-minimising firms
attempt to substitute relatively cheaper inputs for the more expense ones. This refers to the
substitution effect of relative input-price changes. The effect of change in input prices on optimal
input combinations is illustrated by figure 2.2.
Figure 2.2: Substitution Effect of Changes in Input Prices

We assume that, given the price of capital (PK) and price of labour (PL), and the total resources as
indicated by the isocost line, KL, the representative firm’s optimum input- combination is given by
point E in figure 2.2. Suppose that PL decreases (PK remaining constant), resulting in a new isocost,
KW, which is tangent to the isoquant, I2 at point N. At this point, the firm’s new optimum
combination of inputs becomes OK1 + OL3. It follows that the decrease in price of labour (PL) has
given rise to the reduction of capital input by the amount K1K2 and increment of labour input by L1L3.
The change in the input combination is referred to as the price effect of the decrease in the price of
labour. This price effect is composed of substitution and budget effects, where the substitution effect
is represented by the differencebetween price effect and budget effect. Thus,

Substitution effect = Price effect – Budget effect. T hePrice effect = L1L3, and, Budget effect = L1L2
Substitution effect = L1L3 – L1L2 = L2L3

We conclude therefore, that a firm’s input combination changes with a change in the price of a given
input, all things being equal. In this illustration, the firm employs more of the cheaper input (L)
and less of the more expensive one (K). The level of output also changes, as you can infer from
figure 2.2.
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise 1
Determine whether the following production functions show constant, increasing, or
decreasing returns to scale:
(a) 𝑄 = 𝐾 0.60 𝐿0.40
(b) 𝑄 = 5𝐾 0.5 𝐿0.3
(c) 𝑄 = 4𝐿𝐾

Self-Assessment Exercise 2
1. Distinguish between economies of scale and diseconomies of scale.
2. Discuss the two different categories of economies of scale and diseconomies of scale.

Self-Assessment Exercise 3
With the appropriate diagram, discuss the effect of a decrease in the price of labour input on the
optimal input combination, assuming a production function involving capital (K) and labour (L).

5.0 Conclusion
Some of the important production concepts learned from this unit involve: degrees of production
function; economies and diseconomies of scale; returns to scale; and, optimal input combinations. We
learned that Economies of scale are of two different categories:
i. Internal or Real economies; and,
ii. External or Pecuniary Economies.

Diseconomies of scale represent disadvantages that arise due to the expansion of scale of production,
leading to a rise in production cost. This may be internal or external.
6.0 Summary
A production function is said to be homogeneous of degree 1 if when all inputs are increased by a
certain proportion, output is increased by the same proportion. For instance, if when all inputs are
increased by a certain proportion (say, k) and output increases by the same proportion (k), the
production function is said to be homogeneous of degree 1. A homogeneous production function of
degree 1 implies constant returns to scale. In general, given the production function:
ℎ𝑄𝑋 = 𝑓(𝑘𝐾, 𝑘𝐿)
where h denotes h-times increase in output, Qx, as a result of k-times increase in inputs, K and L.
The proportion, h may be greater than k,equal to k, or less than k. This touches on the three laws of
returns to scale:
i. If h = k, production function reveals constant returns to scale
ii. If h > k, production function reveals increasing returns to scale
iii. If h < k, the production function reveals decreasing returns to scale.

Economies of scale give rise to cost savings, while diseconomies of scale lead to cost increases.
Economies and diseconomies of scale determine also the returns to scale in production. Increasing
returns to scale operates until economies of scale are greater than the economies of scale. When
economies of scale and diseconomies of scale are in balance, returns to scale are constant. The
least-cost combination of inputs is also the optimal input combinations. This is the combination of
inputs for which the marginal revenue products of the inputs are equal.

7.0 References/Further Readings


Baumol, W. J. (1985). Economic Theory and operations Analysis, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi
Bilas, R. A. (1971). Microeconomic Theory, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Boulding. K. E. (1966). Economics Analysis: Microeconomics, 4th Edition, New York Harper and
Row.
Douglas, E. J. (1983). Managerial Economics: Theory and Practice and problems, Prentice-Hall Inc.,
New Jersey. 2nd edition.
Ferguson, C. E. (1972). Microeconomic Theory, 3rd Edition, Illnois, Richard D. Irwin, Inc.
Haessuler, E. F. & Paul, R. S. (1976). Introductory Mathematical Analysis for Students of Business
and Economics, 2nd edition (Reston Virginia: Reston Publishing Company)
Hirshleifer, J. (1987). Price Theory and Application, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.
Nicholson, W. (1975). Intermediate Microeconomics and Its Application, Dryden Press, Hindale.
Webb, S. C. (1976). Managerial Economics, Houghton Mifflin, Boston.

Self-Assessment Exercise 1 Answer


(a)
𝑄 = 𝐾 0.60 𝐿0.40
ℎ𝑄 = (𝐾𝐾)0.60 (𝐾𝐿)0.40
ℎ𝑄 = 𝐾 0.60+0.40 𝐾 0.60 𝐿0.40
= 𝐾 1 𝐾 0.60 𝐿0.40
Power of K = 1
𝐾 1 , 𝑖𝑚𝑝𝑙𝑖𝑒𝑠 𝑟 = 1
It is constant return to scale
(b)
𝑄 = 5𝐾 0.5 𝐿0.3
ℎ𝑄 = 5(𝐾𝐾)0.5 (𝐾𝐿)0.3
= 5(𝐾 0.5+0.3 𝐾 0.5 𝐿0.3 )
= 5(𝐾 0.8 𝐾 0.5 𝐿0.3 )
The power of K < 1, implies r < 1
It is decreasing return to scale
(c)
𝑄 = 4𝐿𝐾
ℎ𝑄 = 4(𝐾𝐿)1 (𝐾𝐾)1
= 4(𝐾 1+1 𝐿1 𝐾 1 )
= 4(𝐾 2 𝐿1 𝐾 1 )
The power of K > 1 implies r > 1. It is increasing return to scale
Self-Assessment Exercise 2 Answer
Economies of scale refer to the cost advantage experienced by a firm when it increases its level of
output. The advantage arises due to the inverse relationship between the per-unit fixed cost and the
quantity produced. Economies of scale also result in a fall in average variable cost with an increase in
output. This is brought about by operational efficiencies as a result of an increase in the scale of
production. Economies of scale can be internal economies or external economies.

Internal economies of scale: Internal economies’ arise from the expansion of the plant size of the firm
and are internalized. This implies that internal economies are exclusively available to the expanding
firm as a result of: economies in production; economies in marketing; managerial economies;
technological advancement and economies in transport and storage.

External economies of scale: This kind of economies of scale accrues to the expanding firms from the
advantages arising outside the firm, from the input market, for example. External economies
accrue to the large-size firms in the form of discounts and concessions on: (i) large-scale purchase
of raw materials; (ii) large-scale acquisition of external finance; (iii) massive advertisement
campaigns; (iv) large-scale hiring of means of transport and warehouse, and the like.

Diseconomies of scale occur when an additional production unit of output increases marginal cost,
which results in reduction in profit. Instead of production costs declining as more units are produced
(which is the case with economies of scale), the opposite happens, and costs increase with the
production of each additional unit. Diseconomies of scale can be internal economies or external
economies.

Internal Diseconomies of Scale: Economies of scale has some limit, which is reached when the
advantages of division of labour and managerial staff have been fully exploited; excess plant capacity;
excess warehouse capacity; excess transport and communication capacity, and the like.
External Diseconomies of Scale: These are the disadvantages that originate outside the firm: in the
input markets, and due to natural constraints, especially in agriculture and extractive industries. With
the expansion of the industry, for example, the discounts and concessions that are available on bulk
purchases of inputs, as well as concessions on finance will eventually come to an end. Increasing
demand for inputs also put pressure on the input markets leading to increase in input prices that will
further lead to rises in production costs.

Self-Assessment Exercise 3 Answer


Changes in input prices affect the optimal combination of inputs at different magnitudes, depending
on the nature of input price change. If all input prices change in the same proportion, the relative
prices ofinputs (that is the slope of the budget constraint or isocost line) remain unaffected. But when
input prices change at different rates in the same direction, or change at different rates in the
opposite direction, or price of only one input changes while the prices of other inputs remain
constant, the relative prices of the inputs will change. This change in relative input-prices changes
both the input- combinations and the level of output. The change in input-combinations is as a result
of the substitution effect of change in relative prices of inputs. A change in relative prices of inputs
would imply that some inputs have become cheaper in relation to others. Cost-minimising firms
attempt to substitute relatively cheaper inputs for the more expense ones. This refers to the
substitution effect of relative input-price changes. The effect of change in input prices on optimal
input combinations is shown in the diagram below.

We assume that, given the price of capital (PK) and price of labour (PL), and the total resources as
indicated by the isocost line, KL, the representative firm’s optimum input- combination is given by
point E on the diagram. Suppose that PL decreases (PK remaining constant), resulting in a new
isocost, KW, which is tangent to the isoquant, I2 at point N. At this point, the firm’s new optimum
combination of inputs becomes OK1 + OL3. It follows that the decrease in price of labour (PL) has
given rise to the reduction of capital input by the amount K1K2 and increment of labour input by L1L3.
The change in the input combination is referred to as the price effect of the decrease in the price of
labour. This price effect is composed of substitution and budget effects, where the substitution effect
is represented by the differencebetween price effect and budget effect. Thus,

Substitution effect = Price effect – Budget effect. T hePrice effect = L1L3, and, Budget effect = L1L2
Substitution effect = L1L3 – L1L2 = L2L3

We conclude therefore, that a firm’s input combination changes with a change in the price of a given
input, all things being equal. In this illustration, the firm employs more of the cheaper input (L)
and less ofthe more expensive one (K). The level of output also changes.
UNIT 3: THEORY OF COST
Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Types of Cost
3.1 Concepts of Cost
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
Business decisions are generally taken based on the monetary values of inputs and outputs. Note that
the quantity of inputs multiplied by their respective unit prices will give the monetary value or the
cost of production. Production cost is an important factor in all business decisions, especially those
decisions concerning:
a. the location of the weak points in production management;
b. cost minimization;
c. finding the optimal level of output;
d. determination of price and dealers’ margin; and,
e. estimation of the costs of business operation.
In this unit, we present briefly the cost concepts applicable to business decisions.

2.0 Learning Outcomes


At the end of this unit, you will be expected to:
i. Be familiar with the theory of production costs
ii. Estimate the costs of business operation
iii. Minimise production costs
iv. Make plausible costing decisions.
3.0 Types of Cost
1. The Business Cost Concepts
The cost concepts are theoretically grouped under two over-lapping categories:
i. Concepts used for accounting purposes; and,
ii. Analytical cost concepts used in economic analysis of business activities.

2. Accounting Cost Concepts


The accounting cost concepts include:
i. Opportunity Cost and Actual or Explicit Cost: Opportunity cost can be seen as the xpected
returns from the second best use of an economic resource which is foregone due to the scarcity of the
resources. Some scholars refer to opportunity cost as alternative cost. There would be no opportunity
cost if the resources available to the society were unlimited.

Associated with the concept of opportunity cost is the concept of economic rent or economic profit.
Economic rent is the excess of earning from investment over and above the expected profit. The
business implication of this concept is that investing in a given project will be preferred so long as
its economic rent is greater than zero or positive.

Additionally, if firms know the economic rent of various alternative uses of their resources, it will aid
them in the choice of the best investment avenue.

The actual or explicit costs are those out-of-pocket costs of labour, materials, machine, plant building
and other factors of production.

ii. Business and Full Costs: All the expenses incurred to carry out a business are referred to as
business costs. These are similar to actual or real costs, and include all the payments and contractual
obligations made by the firm, together with the book cost of depreciation on plant and equipment.
Business costs are those used in calculating business profits and losses and for filing returns for
income tax and for other legal purposes.
Full costs include business costs, opportunity costs and normal profit, while normal profit represents
a necessary minimum earning in addition to the opportunity cost, which a firm must receive to
remain in business.

iii. Explicit and Implicit/Imputed Costs: These are costs falling under business costs and are those
entered in the books of accounts. Payments for wages and salaries, materials, insurance premium,
depreciation charges are examples of explicit costs. These costs involve cash payments and are
recorded in accounting practices.

Those costs that do not involve cash outlays or payments and do not appear in the business accounting
system are referred to as implicit or imputed costs. Implicit costs are not taken into account while
calculating the loss or gains of the business, though they form an important consideration in whether
or not a factor will be continued in use for the day to day operations of the business. The explicit and
implicit costs together (explicit + implicit costs) form the economic cost.

iv. Out-of-Pocket and Book Costs: Expenditure items that involve cash payments or cash transfers,
both recurring and non-recurring, are referred to in economics as out-of- pocket costs. All the
explicit costs including wages, rent, interest, cost of materials, maintenance, transport expenditures,
and the like are in this classification. On the contrary, there exists some actual business costs which
do not involve cash payments, but a provision is made in the books of account and they are taken into
account while finalizing the profit and loss accounts. Such costs are known as book costs. These are
somehow, payments made by a firm to itself.

3.1 Concepts of Cost


The analytical cost concepts include:
1. Fixed and Variable Costs
2. Total, Average, and Marginal Costs
3. Short-Run and Long-Run Costs
4. Incremental Costs and Sunk Costs
5. Historical and Replacement Costs
6. Private and Social Costs

1. Fixed and Variable Costs: Fixed costs are those costs that are fixed in volume for a certain level
of output. They do not vary with output. They remain constant regardless of the level of output.
Fixed costs include:
(i) Cost of managerial and administrative staff;
(ii) Depreciation of machinery;
(iii) Land maintenance, and the like. Fixed costs are normally short-term concepts because, in
the long-run, all costs must vary.

Variable Costs are those that vary with variations in output. These include:
(i) Cost of raw materials;
(ii) Running costs of fixed capital, such as fuel, repairs, routine maintenance expenditure, direct
labour charges associated withoutput levels; and
(iii) the Costs of all other inputs that may vary with the level of output.
𝑇𝐶 = 𝑇𝐹𝐶 + 𝑇𝑉𝐶 (3.1)

2. Total, Average, and Marginal Costs: The Total Cost (TC) refers to the total expenditure on the
production of goods and services. It includes both explicit and implicit costs. The explicit costs
themselves are made up of fixed and variable costs. For a given level of output, the total cost is
determined by the cost function.

Figure 3.1: Fixed Cost, Variable Cost and Total Cost


Figure 3.2: Average Cost and Marginal Cost

The Average cost (AC) is obtained by dividing total cost (TC) by total output (Q). Thus,
𝑇𝐶
𝐴𝐶 = (3.2)
𝑄

Marginal Cost (MC) is the addition to total cost on account of producing one additional unit of a
product. It is the cost of the marginal unit produced. Marginal cost of output can be computed as
𝑇𝐶𝑛 − 𝑇𝐶𝑛−1 , where n represents the current number of units produced, and n-1 represents the
previous number of units produced. MC can also be computed by the following relationship:
∆𝑇𝐶
𝑀𝐶 = (3.3)
∆𝑄

If the total cost (TC) is in a functional form, MC can be computed by the derivative:
𝜕𝑇𝐶
𝑀𝐶 = (3.4)
𝜕𝑄

3. Short-Run and Long-Run Costs: Short-Run Costs are costs which change as desired output
changes, size of the firm remaining constant. These costs are often referred to as variable costs.
Long-Run costs, on the other hand are costs incurred on the firm’s fixed assets, such as plant,
machinery, building, and the like. In the long-run, all costs become variable costs as the size of the
firm or scale of production increases. Put differently, long-run costs are associated with changes in
the size and type of plant.

4. Incremental Costs and Sunk Costs: Conceptually, incremental costs are closely related to the
concept of marginal cost, but with a relatively wider connotation. While marginal cost refers to the
cost of extra or one more unit of output, incremental cost refers to the total additional cost associated
with the decision to expand output or to add a new variety of product. The concept of incremental
cost is based on the fact that, in the real world, it is not practicable to employ factors for each unit
of output separately due to lack of perfect divisibility of inputs. Incremental costs also arise as a
result of change in product line, addition or introduction of a new product, replacement of worn out
plant and machinery, replacement of old technique of production with a new one, and the like.

The Sunk costs are those costs that cannot be altered, increased or decreased, by varying the rate of
output. For instance, once management decides to make incremental investment expenditure and the
funds are allocated and spent, all preceding costs are considered to be the sunk costs since they
accord to the prior commitment and cannot be reversed or recovered when there is a change in
market conditions or a change in business decisions.

5. Historical and Replacement Costs: Historical cost refers to the cost an asset acquired in the past,
whereas, replacement cost refers to the outlay made for replacing an old asset. These concepts
derive from the unstable nature of price behaviour. When prices become stable over time, other
things being equal, historical and replacement costs will be at par with each other.

6. Private and Social Costs: Private and social costs are those costs which arise as a result of the
functioning of a firm, but neither are normally reflected in the business decisions nor are explicitly
borne by the firm. Costs in this category are borne by the society. It follows that the total cost
generated in the course of doingbusiness may be divided into two categories:
i. those paid out by the firm; and,
ii. those not paid or borne by the firm, including the use of resources that are freely available plus the
disutility created in the process of production. Costs under the first category are known as private
costs. Those of the second category are known as external or social costs. Examples of such social
costs include: water pollution from oil refineries, air pollution costs by mills and factories located
near a city, and the like. From a firm’s point of view, such costs are classified as external costs, and
from the society’s point of view, they are classified as social costs.

The relevance of the concept of social costs is more pronounced in the cost-benefit analysis of the
overall impact of a firm’s operation in the society as a whole, and in working out the social cost of
private gains.

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise 1


Distinguish between the following:
i. Accounting cost and Opportunity cost
ii. Explicit cost and Implicit cost

Self-Assessment Exercises 2
With geometrical illustrations, differentiate between the following:
i. Fixed and Variable Costs
ii. Total, Average, and Marginal Costs
2. Write short notes on: short-run cost and long-run cost

5.0 Conclusion
This unit focused on the general cost concepts. The cost concepts are theoretically grouped under two
over-lapping categories:
i. Concepts used for accounting purposes; and,
ii. Analytical cost concepts used in economic analysis of businessactivities.

The accounting cost concepts include:


i. Opportunity costs and explicit costs
ii. Business and full costs
iii. Explicit and imputed costs
iv. Out-of-pocket and Book costsThe analytical cost concepts include:
v. Fixed and Variable Costs
vi. Total, Average, and Marginal Costs
vii. Short-Run and Long-Run Costs
viii. Incremental Costs and Sunk Costs
ix. Historical and Replacement Costs
x. Private and Social Costs

6.0 Summary
The unit’s discussions can be summarised as follows:
First, opportunity cost can be seen as the expected returns from the second best use of an economic
resource which is foregone due to the scarcity of the resources. Some scholars refer to opportunity
cost as alternative cost. There would be no opportunity cost if the resources available to the society
were unlimited.

Associated with the concept of opportunity cost is the concept of economic rent or economic profit.
Economic rent is the excess of earning from investment over and above the expected profit. The
business implication of this concept is that investing in a given project will be preferred so long as
its economic rent is greater than zero or positive.
Second, all the expenses incurred to carry out a business are referred toas business costs.
Third, those costs that do not involve cash outlays or payments and do not appear in the business
accounting system are referred to as implicit or imputed costs.
Fourth, the analytical cost concepts used in economic analysis of business activities include: (i) Fixed
and Variable Costs. Fixed costs are those costs that are fixed in volume for a certain level of output.
Variable Costs are those that vary with variations in output. (ii) Total, Average, and Marginal Costs.
(iii) Short-Run and Long-Run Costs. Short-Run Costs are costs which change as desired output
changes, sizeof the firm remaining constant. These costs are often referred to as variable costs. Long-
Run costs, on the other hand are costs incurred on the firm’s fixed assets, such as plant,
machinery, building, and the like. (iv) Incremental Costs and Sunk Costs. Incremental costs are
closely related to the concept of marginal cost, but with a relatively wider connotation. While
marginal cost refers to the cost of extra or one more unit of output, incremental cost refers to the total
additional cost associated with the decision to expand output or to add a new variety of product. The
Sunk costs are those costs that cannot be altered, increased or decreased, by varying the rate of
output. (v) Historical and Replacement Costs. Historical cost refers to the cost an asset acquired in
the past, whereas, replacement cost refers to the outlay made for replacing an old asset. (vi) Private
and Social Costs. Private and social costs are those costs which arise as a result of the functioning of a
firm, but neither are normally reflected in the business decisions nor are explicitly borne by the firm.
Costs in this category are borne by the society.

7.0 References/Further Readings


Baumol, W. J. (1985). Economic Theory and operations Analysis, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi
Bilas, R. A. (1971). Microeconomic Theory, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Boulding. K. E. (1966). Economics Analysis: Microeconomics, 4th Edition, New York Harper and
Row.
Douglas, E. J. (1983). Managerial Economics: Theory and Practice and problems, Prentice-Hall Inc.,
New Jersey. 2nd edition.
Ferguson, C. E. (1972). Microeconomic Theory, 3rd Edition, Illnois, Richard D. Irwin, Inc.
Haessuler, E. F. & Paul, R. S. (1976). Introductory Mathematical Analysis for Students of Business
and Economics, 2nd edition (Reston Virginia: Reston Publishing Company)
Hirshleifer, J. (1987). Price Theory and Application, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.
Nicholson, W. (1975). Intermediate Microeconomics and Its Application, Dryden Press, Hindale.
Webb, S. C. (1976). Managerial Economics, Houghton Mifflin, Boston.

Self-Assessment Exercise 1 Answer


1. Accounting Cost: The costs which are known by profit and loss account of the firm are called
accounting costs. It is cost incur on the factors of production. The cost on labour (wages), the cost on
capital (interest) and cost on land (rent).
Opportunity cost can be seen as the expected returns from the second best use of an economic
resource which is foregone due to the scarcity of the resources.

2. Explicit Costs: These are costs falling under business costs and are those entered in the books of
accounts. Payments for wages and salaries, materials, insurance premium, depreciation charges are
examples of explicit costs. These costs involve cash payments and are recorded in accounting
practices.
Implicit Cost: Those costs that do not involve cash outlays or payments and do not appear in the
business accounting system are referred to as implicit or imputed costs. Implicit costs are not taken
into account while calculating the loss or gains of the business, though they form an important
consideration in whether or not a factor will be continued in use for the day to day operations of the
business.

Self-Assessment Exercise 2 Answer


1i. Fixed costs are those costs that are fixed in volume for a certain level of output. They do not vary
with output. They remain constant regardless of the level of output. Fixed costs include: cost of
managerial and administrative staff; depreciation of machinery; land maintenance, and the like.
Fixed costs are normally short-term concepts because, in the long-run, all costs must vary.
𝐹𝐶 = 𝑇𝐶 − 𝑉𝐶

Variable Costs are those that vary with variations in output. These include: Cost of raw materials;
running costs of fixed capital, such as fuel, repairs, routine maintenance expenditure, direct labour
charges associated with output levels; and the Costs of all other inputs that may vary with the level
of output.
𝑉𝐶 = 𝑇𝐶 − 𝐹𝐶

1ii. Total Cost (TC) refers to the total expenditure on the production of goods and services. It includes
both explicit and implicit costs. The explicit costs themselves are made up of fixed and variable
costs. For a given level of output, the total costis determined by the cost function.
𝑇𝐶 = 𝑇𝐹𝐶 + 𝑇𝑉𝐶

The Average cost (AC) is obtained by dividing total cost (TC) by total output (Q). Thus,
𝑇𝐶
𝐴𝐶 = 𝑄

Marginal Cost (MC) is the addition to total cost on account of producing one additional unit of a
product. It is the cost of the marginal unit produced. Marginal cost of output can be computed as
𝑇𝐶𝑛 − 𝑇𝐶𝑛−1 , where n represents the current number of units produced, and n-1 represents the
previous number of units produced. MC can also be computed by the following relationship:
∆𝑇𝐶
𝑀𝐶 = ∆𝑄

If the total cost (TC) is in a functional form, MC can be computed by the derivative:
𝜕𝑇𝐶
𝑀𝐶 = 𝜕𝑄

2. Short-Run Costs are costs which change as desired output changes, size of the firm remaining
constant. These costs are often referred to as variable costs.
Long-Run costs, on the other hand are costs incurred on the firm’s fixed assets, such as plant,
machinery, building, and the like. In the long-run, all costs become variable costs as the size of the
firm or scale of production increases. Put differently, long-run costs are associated with changes in
the size and type of plant.
UNIT 4: COST-OUTPUT RELATIONS
Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Cost-Output Relations
3.1 Cost Functions
3.2 Cost Minimisation
3.3 Output Optimisation in the Short-Run
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
The theory of costs basically deals with costs in relation to output changes. In other words, they deal
with cost-output relations. The basic economic principle states that total cost increases with increase
in output. However, what is important from a theoretical and marginal point of view is not the
absolute increase in total cost, but the direction of change in the average cost (AC) and the marginal
cost (MC). The direction of changes in AC and MC will depend on the nature of the cost function. In
this unit, we examine in detail the cost-output relations.

2.0 Learning Outcomes


Having gone through this unit, you will be expected to:
i. Expand your knowledge of the theory of costs
ii. Know the theoretical cost-output relations
iii. Apply cost functions in the minimisation of costs of production.

3.0 Cost-Output Relations


A cost function is a symbolic statement of the technological relationship between the cost and output.
Generally, cost functions take thefollowing form:
𝐶 = 𝑇𝐶 = 𝑓(𝑄), 𝑎𝑛𝑑 ∆𝑄 > 0 where; Q represents output level.
In addition, the specific form of the cost function depends on the time framework for cost analysis:
short-or long-run. Thus, there exists short-run cost function and long-run cost function. Accordingly,
cost-output relationship are analysed in short run and long-run frameworks.

3.1 Cost Functions


1. The Short-Run Cost Function
Cost-output relations are normally determined by the cost function and are exhibited by cost curves.
The shape of cost curves depends on the nature of the cost function which are derived from actual cost
data. Cost functions may take a variety of forms, yielding different kinds of cost curves, including
linear, quadratic, and cubic cost curves arising from the corresponding functions. The functions are
as illustrated below:
i. Linear Cost Function. A linear cost function is of the form:
𝑇𝐶 = 𝐶 = 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑄 (4.1)
where Total Fix Cost (TFC) = 𝑎; Total Variable Cost (TVC) = 𝑏𝑄

The Average and Marginal cost functions can be obtained from the Total Cost function in equation
(4.1) as follows:
𝑇𝐶 𝑎+𝑏𝑄
Average Cost (AC) = =
𝑄 𝑄
𝑎
𝐴𝐶 = 𝑄 + 𝑏 (4.2)
𝜕𝑇𝐶
Marginal Cost (MC) = =𝑏
𝜕𝑄

𝑀𝐶 = 𝑏 (4.3)
Assuming a cost function as:
𝑇𝐶 = 60 + 10𝑄 (4.4)
The cost curves which consist of TFC, TVC and TC are represented by figure 4.1.
Figure 4.1: Linear Cost Functions

Figure 4.2.: AC and MC Curves Derived from Linear Cost Functions

ii. Quadratic Cost Function. The quadratic cost function is of the form:
𝑇𝐶 = 𝐶 = 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑄 + 𝑄 2 (4.5)
From the quadratic cost function in equation (4.5), we can obtain the Average and Marginal cost
functions as follows:
𝑇𝐶 𝑎+𝑏𝑄+𝑄 2
𝐴𝐶 = =
𝑄 𝑄
𝑎
= +𝑏+𝑄 (4.6)
𝑄

𝜕𝑇𝐶 𝜕(𝑎+𝑏𝑄+𝑄 2 )
𝑀𝐶 = =
𝜕𝑄 𝜕𝑄

𝑀𝐶 = 𝑏 + 2𝑄 (4.7)

Example, if 𝑇𝐶 = 50 + 5𝑄 + 𝑄 2 (4.8)
Calculate the average cost and the marginal cost
Then,
𝑇𝐶 50+5𝑄+𝑄 2
𝐴𝐶 = =
𝑄 𝑄
50
𝐴𝐶 = +5+𝑄 (4.9)
𝑄

𝜕𝑇𝐶 𝜕(50+5𝑄+𝑄 2 )
𝑀𝐶 = =
𝜕𝑄 𝜕𝑄

𝑀𝐶 = 5 + 2𝑄 (4.10)
The cost curves derived from the quadratic cost function is presented in figure 4.3 in panel (a) and (b).
Panel (a) shows the FC, TVC and TC curves while panel (b) shows AVC, AC and MC curves.

Figure 4.3: Cost Curves Derived from a Quadratic Cost Function

iii. Cubic Cost Function. The cubic cost function is of the form:
𝑇𝐶 = 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑄 + 𝑐𝑄 2 + 𝑑𝑄 3 (4.11)
The corresponding Average Cost (AC) and Marginal Cost (MC)functions can be derived as:
𝑇𝐶 𝑎+𝑏𝑄+𝑐𝑄 2 +𝑑𝑄 3
𝐴𝐶 = =
𝑄 𝑄
𝑎
= 𝑄 + 𝑏 + 𝑐𝑄 + 𝑑𝑄 2 (4.12)
𝜕𝑇𝐶 𝜕(𝑎+𝑏𝑄+𝑐𝑄 2 +𝑑𝑄 3 )
𝑀𝐶 = =
𝜕𝑄 𝜕𝑄
2
= 𝑏 + 2𝑐𝑄 + 3𝑑𝑄 (4.13)

Example:
Assume that the cost function is empirically and explicitly estimated as:
𝑇𝐶 = 10 + 6𝑄 − 0.9𝑄 2 + 0.05𝑄 3 (4.14)
and,
𝑇𝑉𝐶 = 6𝑄 − 0.9𝑄 2 + 0.05𝑄 3 (4.15)

Figure 4.4: Cost Curves Derived from a Cubic Cost Function

Based on equations (4.14) and (4.15), the TC and TVC, respectively is calculated for Q = 1 to 10 and
presented in table 4.1.

Table 4.1: Short-run Cost-Output Relations

Q FC TVC TC AFC AVC AC MC


(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
0 10 0.0 10.00 - - - -
1 10 5.15 15.15 10.00 5.15 15.15 5.15
2 10 8.80 18.80 5.00 4.40 9.40 3.65
3 10 11.25 21.25 3.33 3.75 7.08 2.45
4 10 12.80 22.80 2.50 3.20 5.70 1.55
5 10 13.75 23.75 2.00 2.75 4.75 0.95
6 10 14.40 24.40 1.67 2.40 4.07 0.65
7 10 15.05 25.05 1.43 2.15 3.58 0.65
8 10 16.00 26.00 1.25 2.00 3.25 0.95
9 10 17.55 27.55 1.11 1.95 3.06 1.55
10 10 20.00 30.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 2.45
Figure 4.5: Short-run Cost Curves Derived from Table 4.1

Using equations (4.14) and (4.15), you can derive the behavioural equations for the average fixed cost
(AFC), average variable cost (AVC), average total cost (ATC), and marginal cost (MC) as follows:
𝐹𝐶
𝐴𝐹𝐶 = 𝑄
10
𝐴𝐹𝐶 = (4.16)
𝑄
𝑇𝑉𝐶
𝐴𝑉𝐶 = 𝑄

6𝑄−0.9𝑄2 +0.05𝑄3
= 𝑄

𝐴𝑉𝐶 = 6 − 0.9𝑄 + 0.05𝑄 2 (4.17)


𝑇𝐶
𝐴𝑇𝐶 = 𝑄
𝑇𝐶
= 𝑄

10+6𝑄−0.9𝑄 2 +0.05𝑄 3
=
𝑄
10
𝐴𝐶 = + 6 − 0.9𝑄 + 0.05𝑄 2 (4.18)
𝑄

𝜕𝑇𝐶 𝜕(10+6𝑄−0.9𝑄2 +0.05𝑄3 )


𝑀𝐶 = =
𝜕𝑄 𝜕𝑄

𝑀𝐶 = 6 + 1.8𝑄 + 0.15𝑄 2 (4.19)


3.2 Cost Minimisation
One major objective of a firm is to minimise its average cost (AC) of producing a unit of it product
which is similar to output miximisation. A firm can minimise AC or AVC. Assume a firm wants to
10
minimise it AC given in equation (4.18), 𝐴𝐶 = + 6 − 0.9𝑄 + 0.05𝑄 2
𝑄

Thus, the optimum value of Q can be obtained by differentiating AC and equal it to zero (0):
10
𝜕𝐴𝐶 𝜕( +6−0.9𝑄+0.05𝑄 2 )
𝑄
= =0
𝜕𝑄 𝜕𝑄
10
− 0.9 + 0.1𝑄 2 = 0
𝑄2

−10 − 0.9𝑄 2 + 0.1𝑄 3 = 0


𝑄 3 − 9𝑄 2 − 100 = 0
Solving for Q, we have
𝑄 3 − 9𝑄 2 − 100 = 0
(𝑄 − 10)(𝑄 2 + 𝑄 + 10) = 0
From this, one term must be equal to zero, thus.
(𝑄 − 10) = 0
𝑄 = 10
AC reaches its minimum at 𝑄 = 10
The output that will minimise the average cost (AC) is 10 units.
If AVC is minimized from:
𝐴𝑉𝐶 = 6 − 0.9𝑄 + 0.05𝑄 2
The average variable cost will be at its minimum when its rate of change equal to zero (0). This can
be accomplished bydifferentiating the AVC function with respect to output (Q).
𝜕𝐴𝑉𝐶 𝜕(6−0.9𝑄+0.05𝑄2 )
= =0
𝜕𝑄 𝜕𝑄

−0.9 + 0.1𝑄 = 0
0.1𝑄 = 0.9
0.9
𝑄 = 0.1

𝑄=9

3.3 Output Optimisation in the Short-Run


The optimum level of output in the short-run is the level of output for which the average cost (AC) of
production equals the marginal cost(MC). That is, for optimum output, AC = MC in the short-run.
Suppose the short-run cost function is given by:
𝑇𝐶 = 200 + 5𝑄 + 2𝑄 2 (4.19)
𝑇𝐶 200+5𝑄+2𝑄 2
𝐴𝐶 = =
𝑄 𝑄
200
𝐴𝐶 = + 5 + 2𝑄 (4.20)
𝑄

𝜕𝑇𝐶 𝜕(200+5𝑄+2𝑄 2 )
𝑀𝐶 = =
𝜕𝑄 𝜕𝑄

𝑀𝐶 = 5 + 4𝑄 (4.21)
By using AC = MC at optimum, and solving for Q, you will obtain the optimum level of output.
200
+ 5 + 2𝑄 = 5 + 4𝑄
𝑄
200
= 2𝑄
𝑄

2𝑄 2 = 200
𝑄 2 = 100
𝑄 = 10
Thus the optimum level of output in this example is 10 units.

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercises 1


1⁄
Given the cost function: 𝐶 = 100 + 10𝑄 2 + 𝑄 + 2𝑄 2
Derive the average and marginal cost functions. At 5 units of output, what are the values of average
cost and marginal cost.

Self-Assessment Exercises 2
Peace Transport has been engaged to convey NOUN students as tourists from the University campus
to Bar Beach, Lagos. The company is interested in minimizing its Average Cost (AC) on the journey.
Suppose that it Total Cost (TC) function has been determined as:
𝑇𝐶 = 100 + 60𝑁 + 4𝑁 2
How many numbers of tourists should the company accept if it must achieve the objective of Average
Cost (AC) minimization?

5.0 Conclusion
This unit has exposed you to the principles of cost-output relations. You must have learned that short-
run cost functions are of different categories:
(i) the linear cost function; (ii) the quadratic cost function; and, (iii) the cubic cost function. Also, an
important learning from the unit is the procedures for cost minimisation.

6.0 Summary
You may have learned from this unit that Cost-output relations are normally determined by the cost
function and are exhibited by cost curves. The shape of cost curves depends on the nature of the cost
function which are derived from actual cost data. Cost functions maytake a variety of forms, yielding
different kinds of cost curves, including linear, quadratic, and cubic cost curves arising from the
corresponding functions. With respect to the minimisation of production cost, you learned that in its
simplest form, the critical value of output (Q) in respect of the average variable cost (AVC) is the
value that minimises average variable cost. The average variable cost will be at its minimum when its
𝜕(𝐴𝑉𝐶)
rate of change ( ) = 0.
𝜕𝑄

Finally, you were informed that the optimum level of output in the short-run is the level of output for
which the average cost (AC) of production equals the marginal cost (MC). That is, for optimum
output, AC = MC in the short-run.

7.0 References/Further Readings


Baumol, W. J. (1985). Economic Theory and operations Analysis, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi
Bilas, R. A. (1971). Microeconomic Theory, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Boulding. K. E. (1966). Economics Analysis: Microeconomics, 4th Edition, New York Harper and
Row.
Douglas, E. J. (1983). Managerial Economics: Theory and Practice and problems, 2nd Edition.
Prentice-Hall Inc., New Jersey.
Ferguson, C. E. (1972). Microeconomic Theory, 3rd Edition, Illnois, Richard D. Irwin, Inc.
Haessuler, E. F. & Paul, R. S. (1976), Introductory Mathematical Analysis for Students of Business
and Economics, 2nd edition (Reston Virginia: Reston Publishing Company)
Hirshleifer, J. (1987). Price Theory and Application, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.
Nicholson, W. (1975). Intermediate Microeconomics and Its Application, Dryden Press, Hindale.
Webb, S. C. (1976). Managerial Economics, Houghton Mifflin, Boston.

Self-Assessment Exercises 1 Answer


1⁄
𝐶 = 100 + 10𝑄 2 + 𝑄 + 2𝑄 2
AC function
𝐶
𝐴𝐶 = 𝑄
1
100+10𝑄 ⁄2 +𝑄+2𝑄 2
= 𝑄
1
100 10𝑄 ⁄2 𝑄 2𝑄 2
= + +𝑄+
𝑄 𝑄 𝑄
1
100 10𝑄 ⁄2
𝐴𝐶 = + + 2𝑄
𝑄 𝑄

MC function
1
𝛿𝐶 𝛿(100+10𝑄 ⁄2 +𝑄+2𝑄 2 )
=
𝛿𝑄 𝛿𝑄
1 1⁄ −1
= 2𝑄 2 + 1 + 4𝑄
1 −1⁄
𝑀𝐶 = 2 𝑄 2 + 1 + 4𝑄
𝑄 −1/2
𝑀𝐶 = + 4𝑄 + 1
2

Self-Assessment Exercises 2 Answer


𝑇𝐶 = 100 + 60𝑁 + 4𝑁 2
𝑇𝐶
𝑇𝐶 = 𝑁
100+60𝑁+4𝑁 2
= 𝑁
100
𝐴𝐶 = + 60 + 4𝑁
𝑁

𝐴𝐶 = 100𝑁 −1 + 60 + 4𝑁
𝛿𝐴𝐶
= −100𝑁 −2 + 4 = 0
𝛿𝑁
1
−100 × 𝑁2 + 4 = 0
−100
+4=0
𝑁2

−100 + 4𝑁 2 = 0
4𝑁 2 = 100
𝑁 2 = 25
𝑁 = 5 𝑡𝑜𝑢𝑟𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑠
The company will accept 5 tourists to achieve the objective of Average Cost (AC) minimization.
UNIT 5: LONG-RUN COST-OUTPUT RELATIONS AND BREAK-EVEN ANALYSIS
Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Long-Run Cost-Output Relations and Break-Even Analysis
3.1 Long-Run Cost-Output Relations
3.2 Break-Even Analysis: Linear Cost and Revenue Functions
3.3 Break-Even Analysis: Non-Linear Cost and RevenueFunction
3.4 Profit Volume (PV) Ratio
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
By definition, the long-run is a period for which all inputs change or become variable. This is based
on the assumption that in the long-run, supply of all inputs, including those held constant in the short-
run, becomes elastic. Firms are therefore, now in a position to expand the scale of production by
increasing all inputs. It follows that the long-run cost- output relations imply the relationship
between the changing scale of a firm and the firm’s total output, whereas in the short-run, this
relationship is essentially one between the total output and the variable costs such as, labour and raw
materials. In this unit, we discuss the long- run cost-output relations especially with specific reference
to the firm’s break-even conditions.

2.0 Learning Outcomes


At the end of this unit you will be able to:
i. Be more familiar with issues on cost-output relations
ii. Make long-run cost and output decisions
iii. Determine your optimum plant size
3.0 Long-Run Cost-Output Relations and Break-EvenAnalysis
3.1 Long-Run Cost-Output Relations
The long-run cost curve (LTC) is composed of a series of short-run cost curves. We can derive the
long-run curves and study their relationship with output.

1. Long-Run Total Cost Curve (LTC)


From figure 5.1 in panel (a), we assume that the firm has only one plant, with the corresponding
short-run cost curve given by STC1. Suppose the firm decides to add two more plants with associated
two more short-run cost curves given by STC2 and STC3. The long-run total cost curve (LTC) is
then drawn through the minimum of the short-run cost curves, STC1, STC2, and STC3. The Long-Run
Average Cost Curve (LAC) is derived by combining the short-run average cost curves (SACs). This is
shown in figure 5.1 panel (b).

Figure 5.1: The Long-Run Total Cost Curve (LTC)

2. Long-Run Average Cost Curve


The long-run average cost curve (LAC) is drawn through the short-run average cost curves, SAC1,
SAC2, and SAC3, as indicated by figure 5.1 panel (b).
The firm has a series of SAC curves, each having a bottom point showing the minimum SAC. For
instance, C1Q1 is minimum AC when the firm has only one plant. The AC decreases to C 2Q2 when
the second plant is added and then rises to C 3Q3 after the addition of the third plant. The LAC curve
can be drawn through the SAC1, SAC2 and SAC3. The LAC curve is also known in economics as the
‘Envelope Curve’ or ‘Planning Curve’ as it serves as a guide to the entrepreneurin plans to expand
production.

3. Optimum Plant Size and Long-Run Cost Curves


The short-run cost curves are extremely helpful in the determination of the optimum utilization of a
given plant, or in the determination of the least-cost-output level. Long- run cost curves, on the other
hand, can be used to show how a firm can decide on the optimum size of the firm.

Consequently, the optimum size of the firm is one which ensures the most efficient utilization of the
resources. In practical terms, the optimum size of a firm is one in which the long-run average cost
(LAC) is minimised.

3.2 Break-Even Analysis: Linear Cost and Revenue Functions


Traditionally, the basic objective of any business firm is to maximize profit. The maximum profit
does not necessarily coincide with the minimum cost, according to the traditional theory of the firm.
Nevertheless, firms plan their production activities much better if the level of production for
which total cost and total revenue break even is known. This implies the profitable and non-profitable
range of production. The break- even analysis, or what is often referred to as profit contribution
analysis is an important analytical technique used in studying the relationship between total cost, total
revenue, and total profits and losses over the whole range of stipulated output. The break- even
analysis is a technique of previewing profit prospects and a tool of profit planning. It integrates cost
and revenue estimates to ascertain the profits and losses associated with different levels of output.

In order to exemplify the break-even analysis under linear cost and revenue conditions, you can
assume a linear cost function and linear revenue function as follows:
Cost function: 𝐶 = 100 + 10𝑄 (5.1)
Revenue function: 𝑅 = 15𝑄 (5.2)

The cost function in equation (5.1) implies a total fixed cost (TFC) of N100. Its variable cost varies at
a constant rate of N10 per unit in response to increases in output. The revenue function in equation
(5.2) implies that the market price for the firm’s product is N15 per unit of sale.

Given equations (5.1) and (5.2), the break-even output can be computed algebraically in the following
way:

At the break-even point, Total Revenue (R) = Total Cost (C), so that in this example,
15𝑄 = 100 + 10𝑄
5𝑄 = 100
100
𝑄= 5

𝑄 = 20

It follows that the break-even level of output is 20 units. This result can be illustrated graphically in
figure 5.2.

Figure 5.2: Break-Even Analysis: Linear Functions

3.3 Break-Even Analysis: Non-Linear Cost and Revenue Function


The break-even analysis under non-linear cost and revenue functions is best demonstrated by the
following graph. As shown in figure 5.3 below, the total fixed cost (TFC) line shows the fixed cost at
OF, and the vertical distance between TC and TFC measures the total variable cost (TVC). The curve,
TR, shows the total sales or total revenue at different output levels and at different prices. The
vertical distance between theTR and TC measures the profit or loss for various levels of output.

You will observe from figure 5.3 that the TR and TC curves intersect each other at two points, B1
and B2, where TR = TC. These represent the lower and upper break-even points. For the whole
range of output between OQ1 (corresponding to the break-even point, B1) and OQ2 (corresponding to
the break-even point, B2), TR > TC. This implies that a firm producing more than OQ1 and less than
OQ2 will be making profits. Put differently, the profitable range of output lies between OQ1 and OQ2
units of output. Producing less or more than these limits willgive rise to losses.

Figure 5.3: Break-Even Analysis: Non-Linear Functions

3.4 Profit Volume (PV) Ratio


The profit volume (PV) ratio is another useful tool for finding breaking-even point (BEP) of sales,
especially for multi-purpose firms. The PV ratio is defined by the following formula:
𝑆−𝑉
𝑃𝑉 𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜 = × 100 (5.3)
𝑆

Where S = Selling price, and V = average variable cost


For example, if the selling price, S is N5 per unit, and average variable cost, V is N4 per unit, then;
5−4
𝑃𝑉 𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜 = × 100
5

𝑃𝑉 𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜 = 20 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡
The break-even point (BEP) in sales value is calculated by dividing the fixed expenses (F) by the PV
ratio. Thus,
𝐹𝑖𝑥𝑒𝑑 𝐸𝑥𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑒𝑠 𝐹
𝐵𝐸𝑃 (𝑆𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑠 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒) = = (𝑆−𝑉) (5.4)
𝑃𝑉 𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜 ⁄𝑆

For example, given the selling price at N5 per unit, average variable expenses at N3 per unit and fixed
expenses (F) of N4,000 per month, BEP (sale value) can be calculated thus:
𝐹𝑖𝑥𝑒𝑑 𝐸𝑥𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑒𝑠 𝐹
𝐵𝐸𝑃 (𝑆𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑠 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒) = = (𝑆−𝑉)
𝑃𝑉 𝑅𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜 ⁄𝑆

We can calculate the break-even sale volume by using the contribution per unit of sale by the
following formula.
𝐹𝑖𝑥𝑒𝑑 𝐸𝑥𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑒𝑠
𝐵𝐸𝑃 (𝑆𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑠 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒) = 𝐶𝑜𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑢𝑛𝑖𝑡
4000 4000
𝐵𝐸𝑃 (𝑆𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑠 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒) = =
5−3 2

𝐵𝐸𝑃 (𝑆𝑎𝑙𝑒𝑠 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒) = 2,000 𝑢𝑛𝑖𝑡𝑠


The PV ratio is not only helpful in finding the break-even point but it can also be used for making a
choice of the product.

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise 1


With graphical illustration, discuss the envelope curve.

Self-Assessment Exercise 2
Using geometric illustration, differentiate between linear cost and revenue functions and non-linear
cost and revenue functions of break-even analysis.

Self-Assessment Exercise 3
If a firm selling price N10 per unit, average variable expenses at N5 per unit and fixed expenses (F) of
N6,000 per month, Calculate the break-even point (BEP) for the firm.
5.0 Conclusion
You may have learned from this unit that the long-run in any business life is very important and
must be taken as such. The long-run has been defined as a period for which all inputs change or
become variable. This is based on the assumption that in the long-run, supply of all inputs, including
those held constant in the short-run, becomes elastic.

In addition, the short-run cost curves are extremely helpful in the determination of the optimum
utilization of a given plant, or in the determination of the least-cost-output level. Long-run cost
curves, on the other hand, can be used to show how a firm can decide on the optimum size of the firm.
Finally, the unit informs you that the break-even analysis, or what is often referred to as profit
contribution analysis is an important analytical technique used in studying the relationship between
total cost, total revenue, and total profits and losses over the whole range of stipulated output.

6.0 Summary
Our discussion in the unit can be summarised in the followingstatements:
1. Business managers must plan for the long-run administration of costs revenues and profits. This is
so because in the long run, firms will be in a position to expand the scale of production by increasing
all inputs.
2. In the long-run, with increases in output, the total cost of production first increases at a decreasing
rate, and then at an increasing rate. As a result, the long-run average cost initially decreases until the
optimum utilization of the new plant capacity, and then it begins to increase. These cost-output
relations follow the ‘laws of returns to scale.’
3. Firms are assumed to plan their production activities much better if the level of production for
which total cost and total revenue break even is known. This implies the profitable and non-
profitable range of production. The break-even analysis, or what is often referred to as profit
contribution analysis is an important analytical technique used in studying the relationship between
total cost, total revenue, and total profits and losses over the whole range of stipulated output. The
break-even analysis is a technique of previewing profit prospects and a tool of profit planning.
7.0 References/Further Readings
Baumol, W. J. (1985). Economic Theory and operations Analysis, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi
Bilas, R. A. (1971). Microeconomic Theory, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Boulding. K. E. (1966). Economics Analysis: Microeconomics, 4th Edition, New York Harper and
Row.
Douglas, E. J. (1983). Managerial Economics: Theory and Practice and problems, Prentice-Hall Inc.,
New Jersey. 2nd edition.
Ferguson, C. E. (1972). Microeconomic Theory, 3rd Edition, Illnois, Richard D. Irwin, Inc.
Haessuler, E. F. and Paul, R. S. (1976). Introductory Mathematical Analysis for Students of Business
and Economics, 2nd edition (Reston Virginia: Reston Publishing Company)
Hirshleifer, J. (1987). Price Theory and Application, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.
Nicholson, W. (1975). Intermediate Microeconomics and Its Application, Dryden Press, Hindale.
Webb, S. C. (1976). Managerial Economics, Houghton Mifflin, Boston.

Self-Assessment Exercise 1 Answer

From panel (a), we assume that the firm has only one plant, with the corresponding short-run cost
curve given by STC1. Suppose the firm decides to add two more plants with associated two more
short-run cost curves given by STC2 and STC3. The long-run total cost curve (LTC) is then drawn
through the minimum of the short-run cost curves, STC1, STC2, and STC3. The Long-Run Average
Cost Curve (LAC) is derived by combining the short-run average cost curves (SACs).
The long-run average cost curve (LAC) is drawn through the short-run average cost curves, SAC1,
SAC2, and SAC3 as shown in panel (b). The firm has a series of SAC curves, each having a bottom
point showing the minimum SAC. For instance, C 1Q1 is minimum AC when the firm has only one
plant. The AC decreases to C2Q2 when the second plant is added and then rises to C 3Q3 after the
addition of the third plant. The LAC curve can be drawn through the SAC 1, SAC2 and SAC3. The
LAC curve is also known in economics as the ‘Envelope Curve’ or ‘Planning Curve’ as it serves as
a guide to the entrepreneurin plans to expand production.

Self-Assessment Exercise 2 Answer


The maximum profit does not necessarily coincide with the minimum cost, according to the
traditional theory of the firm. Nevertheless, firms plan their production activities much better if
the level of production for which total cost and total revenue break even is known. This implies the
profitable and non-profitable range of production. The break- even analysis, or what is often referred
to as profit contribution analysis is an important analytical technique used in studying the relationship
between total cost, total revenue, and total profits and losses over the whole range of stipulated
output. The break- even analysis is a technique of previewing profit prospects and a tool of profit
planning. It integrates cost and revenue estimates to ascertain the profits and losses associated with
different levels of output. The graph below is the break-even analysis under linear cost and revenue
conditions,

The break-even analysis under non-linear cost and revenue functions is best demonstrated by the
following graph below. T he total fixed cost (TFC) line shows the fixed cost at OF, and the vertical
distance between TC and TFC measures the total variable cost (TVC). The curve, TR, shows the total
sales or total revenue at different output levels and at different prices. The vertical distance
between theTR and TC measures the profit or loss for various levels of output.

The TR and TC curves intersect each other at two points, B1 and B2, where TR = TC. These
represent the lower and upper break-even points. For the whole range of output between OQ1
(corresponding to the break-even point, B1) and OQ2 (corresponding to the break-even point, B2),
TR > TC. This implies that a firm producing more than OQ1 and less than OQ2 will be making
profits. Put differently, the profitable range of output lies between OQ1 and OQ2 units of output.
Producing less or more than these limits willgive rise to losses.
Self-Assessment Exercise 3 Answer
We can calculate the break-even sale volume by using the contribution per unit of sale by the
following formula.
𝐹𝑖𝑥𝑒𝑑 𝐸𝑥𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑒𝑠
𝐵𝐸𝑃 = 𝐶𝑜𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑢𝑛𝑖𝑡
6000 6000
𝐵𝐸𝑃 = 10−5 = 5

𝐵𝐸𝑃 = 1,200 𝑢𝑛𝑖𝑡𝑠


Module 5: Market Structure and Pricing Decisions

The market structure is known as sellers’ classification which perfect competition and imperfect
competition. The module is made up of 3 units which are: perfect competition; monopoly and
monopolistic competition.

Unit 1: Perfect Competition


Unit 2: Monopoly
Unit 3: Monopolistic Competition

UNIT 1: Perfect Competition


Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Market Structure and Pricing Decisions
3.1 Short-run Price and Output Determination Under Perfect Competition
3.2 Long-run Price and Output Determination Under Perfect Competition
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
The market structure will determine a firm’s ability to make pricing decisions or its degree of freedom
in the determination of product prices. Depending on the market structure, the degree of freedom
varies between zero and one. This degree of freedom implies the extent to which a firm is free or
independent of the rival firm in setting product prices. The higher the degree of competition, the lower
the firm’s degree of freedom in making decisions about product prices. The reverse is also true.
Under perfect competition, a large number of firms compete against one another. It follows that the
degree of competition under perfect competition is close to one. Consequently, a firm’s discretion in
determining the price of its product is close to zero. The firm has to accept the price determined by
the market forces of demand and supply.

As the degree of competition decreases, a firm’s control over the product prices and its discretion in
pricing decisions increases. Under monopolistic competition, where the degree of competition is less
than one, the firm has some discretion in product pricing.

2.0 Learning Outcomes


At the end of this unit, you will be able to:
i. Get acquainted with the basic principles of pricing
ii. Know how to make pricing decisions under perfect competition
iii. Manage consumer price expectations in an effective and efficientmanner.

3.0 Market Structure and Pricing Decisions


In a perfectly competitive market, commodity prices are determined by the market forces of
demand and supply. In other words, market prices are determined by the market demand and market
supply, where the market demand refers to the industry demand as a whole: this is the sum of
quantity demanded by each individual consumer or user of the product at different prices. Similarly,
market supply is the sum of quantity supplied by individual firms in the industry. The market
price is determined for the industry and the individual firms and consumers take the market price as
given. This is the reason sellers under a perfectly competitive market is referred to as price takers.

The main problem facing a profit-maximising firm is therefore, not to determine the price of its
product but to adjust its output its output to the market price so that profit is maximised. The
determination of commodity as well as services price under perfectly-competitive conditions are often
analysed under three different time periods:
i. short-run; and,
ii. long-run.

3.1 Short-run Price and Output Determination Under Perfect Competition


By definition, a short-run refers to the period in which firms can neither change their size nor quit,
nor can new firms enter the industry. While in the market period, supply is absolutely fixed, in the
short-run, it is possible to increase or decrease the supply by increasing or decreasing the variable
inputs. In the short- run, therefore, supply curve is elastic.

The determination of market price in the short-run is illustrated by figures 1.1 (a) and 1.1 (b).
Figure 1.1 (a) shows the determination of output based on industry by the demand curve DD and
supply curve SS at price OP1 or PQ. This price is fixed for all the firms in the industry. Figure 1.1 (b)
is the profit shape of the firm.

Figure 1.1: Pricing in the Short-run Under Perfect Competition

Given the price PQ (=OP1), an individual firm can produce and sell any quantity at this price. But any
quantity will yield maximum profit. Given their cost curves, the firms are required to adjust their
output to the price PQ so that they maximum their profit. The firm’s output determination and
equilibrium are shown in panel (b) of figure 1.1. Profit is maximum at the level of output where MR
equal MC (MR = MC). The demand curve is perfectly elastic and it is the same as the AR and MR.
The AC curve is a U-shape. The MC curve slopes upward and intercepts the AC curve at the
minimum point. At the equilibrium point (E) where MR = MC, the output is an M while the price is at
P1.

Firms may make loss in the short-run when market price decreases to P1Q1 due to downward shift in
the demand curve to D1D1 shown in panel (a) of figure 1.1. This will force a process of output
adjustments till firms reach a new equilibrium at point E1.

3.2 Long-run Price and Output Determination Under Perfect Competition


In the long-run the firm can adjust its size or quit the industry. New firms can also enter the industry.
If the market price is such that Average Revenue (AR) > Long-run Average Cost (LAC), firms will
make economic or super-normal profit. As a result, new firms will enter the industry, causing a
rightward shift in the supply curve. Similarly, if AR < LAC, firms will begin to make losses. In
this case, marginal firms will exit the industry, causing a leftward shift in the supply curve. The
rightward shift in the supply curve pulls down the market price and its leftward shift pushes it
up. This process continues until price is so determined that AR = LAC and firms will now earn only
normal profit.

The long-run price determination and output (or size) adjustments by an individual firm are presented
in figures 1.2 (a) and 1.2 (b) below. Suppose that the long-run demand curve is represented by D1; the
short- run supply is S1, and price is determined at P1. At this price, firms adjust their output to
the point, M, the equilibrium point, where P1 = AR1 = MR1 = LMC. This enables firms to make
economic profit of MS per unit of output. This super-normal profit lures new firms into the industry.
Consequently, the industry supply curve shifts rightward to S2, causing a fall in price to P2. At this
price, firms are in a position to cover only the long-run marginal cost (LMC) at the output Q2. At this
point they will be making losses because AR < LAC. Firms incurring losses cannot survive in the
long-run. Such firms will thus quit the industry. As a result, total industry production decreases,
causing a leftward shift in the supply curve, to the position of S0, for example, with the
corresponding market price at P0. The existing firms then adjust their outputs to the new market
price at the output Q0. At this output, firms are in a position to make only normal profit, where P0
= AR = MR = LMC = LAC, the industry equilibrium position or point. At this point, no firm is in a
position to make economic profit, nor does a firm make losses.
Figure 1.2: Pricing in the Long-Run Under Perfect Competition

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise 1


Distinguish between short-run and long-run price determination of a perfect competitive market.

Self-Assessment Exercise 2
Suppose that the demand function facing a perfect competitive firm is given as:
𝑃 = 30 − 6𝑋
And the total cost function is given as:
𝑇𝐶 = 6𝑋 − 3𝑋 2
i. Determine the output that maximise profit.
ii. What is the profit of the firm?

5.0 Conclusion
The market structure will determine a firm’s ability to make pricing decisions or its degree of freedom
in the determination of product prices. Depending on the market structure, the degree of freedom
varies between zero and one.

The main problem facing a profit-maximising firm is not to determine the price of its product but
to adjust its output to the market price so that profit is maximised.

The determination of commodity as well as services price under perfectly-competitive conditions are
often analysed under two different time periods:
i. short-run; and,
ii. long-run

A perfect competitive firm is a price taker because it agrees with the rule price in the market. Price
and output decision are determined where the price is equal to the marginal cost, marginal revenue
and the average revenue. Are determined where the marginal cost is equal to the price (MC = P).

6.0 Summary
You have just been informed by this unit that:
1. In a perfectly competitive market, commodity prices are determined by the market forces of
demand and supply.
2. The determination of commodity as well as services price under perfectly-competitive conditions
are often analysed under threedifferent time periods:
i. the market period or very short-run;
ii. short-run; and,
iii. long-run.
3. Pricing and output decision under perfect competition are determined where price (P) equals
marginal cost (MC).

7.0 References/Further Readings


Baumol, W. J. (1985). Economic Theory and operations Analysis, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd,
New Delhi
Bilas, R. A. (1971). Microeconomic Theory, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Boulding. K. E. (1966). Economics Analysis: Microeconomics, 4th Edition, New York Harper and
Row.
Douglas, E. J. (1983). Managerial Economics: Theory and Practice and problems, 2nd Edition.
Prentice-Hall Inc., New Jersey.
Ferguson, C. E. (1972). Microeconomic Theory, 3rd Edition, Illnois, Richard D. Irwin, Inc.
Haessuler, E. F. & Paul, R. S. (1976). Introductory Mathematical Analysis for Students of Business
and Economics, 2nd edition (Reston Virginia: Reston Publishing Company)
Hirshleifer, J. (1987). Price Theory and Application, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.
Nicholson, W. (1975). Intermediate Microeconomics and Its Application, Dryden Press, Hindale.
Webb, S. C. (1976). Managerial Economics, Houghton Mifflin, Boston.

Self-Assessment Exercise 1 Answer


Short-run is a period in which firms can neither change their size nor quit, nor can new firms enter
the industry. While in the market period, supply is absolutely fixed, in the short-run, it is
possible to increase or decrease the supply by increasing or decreasing the variable inputs. In the
short- run, therefore, supply curve is elastic.

The determination of the market price in the short-run in shown in the panels (a) and (b) below.
Panel (a) shows the determination of output based on industry by the demand curve DD and supply
curve SS at price OP1 or PQ. This price is fixed for all the firms in the industry. Panel(b) is the profit
shape of the firm.
Given the price PQ (=OP1), an individual firm can produce and sell any quantity at this price. But any
quantity will yield maximum profit. Given their cost curves, the firms are required to adjust their
output to the price PQ so that they maximum their profit. The firm’s output determination and
equilibrium are shown in panel (b). Profit is maximum at the level of output where MR equal MC
(MR = MC). The demand curve is perfectly elastic and it is the same as the AR and MR. The AC
curve is a U-shape. The MC curve slopes upward and intercepts the AC curve at the minimum point.
At the equilibrium point (E) where MR = MC, the output is an M while the price is at P1.

Self-Assessment Exercise 2 Answer


i.
𝑃 = 30 − 6𝑋
𝑇𝐶 = 6𝑋 − 3𝑋 2
𝑇𝑅 = 𝑃𝑋
= (30 − 6𝑋)𝑋
𝑇𝑅 = 30𝑋 − 6𝑋 2
𝑀𝑅 = 30 − 12𝑋
𝑇𝐶 = 6𝑋 − 3𝑋 2
𝑀𝐶 = 6 − 6𝑋
𝑀𝑅 = 𝑀𝐶
30 − 12𝑋 = 6 − 6𝑋
30 − 6 = 12𝑋 − 6𝑋
24 = 6𝑋
𝑋=4
Output that maximise profit is 4 units

ii. Profit = TR - TC
= 30𝑋 − 6𝑋 2 − (6𝑋 − 3𝑋 2 )
𝑋=4
= 30(4) − 6(4)2 − (6(4) − 3(4)2 )
Profit = 48
The profit of the firm is 48
UNIT 2: MONOPOLY
Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Price Determination Under Monopoly
3.1 Short-run Price and Output Determination Under Monopoly
3.2 Long-run Price and Output Determination Under Monopoly
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
Monopoly is a market structure characterized by a single seller, selling a unique product in
the market. In a monopoly market, the seller faces no competition, as he is the sole seller of
goods with no close substitute. In a monopoly market, factors like government license,
ownership of resources, copyright and patent and high starting cost make an entity a single
seller of goods.

All these factors restrict the entry of other sellers in the market. Monopolies also possess
some information that is not known to other sellers. Characteristics associated with a
monopoly market make the single seller the market controller as well as the price maker. He
enjoys the power of setting the price for his goods

2.0 Learning Outcomes


At the end of this unit, you will be able to:
i. Understand the main distinguishing different that monopoly has with other market
structure.
ii. Know how monopoly determines it price and output in the short-run and long-run.
3.0 Price and Output Determination Under Pure Monopoly
The term pure monopoly connotes absolute power to produce and sell a product with no close
substitute. A monopoly market is one in which there is only on seller of a product having no
close substitute. The cross- elasticity of demand for a monopolist’s product is either zero or
negative. A monopolized industry refers to a single-firm industry.

3.1 Short-run Price and Output Determination Under Monopoly


As in the case of perfect competition, pricing and output decision under monopoly are based
on revenue and cost conditions. The cost conditions (AC and MC curves) are same for both
perfect competition and pure monopoly. The difference is basically in the revenue
conditions (AR and MR curves). This is so because, unlike the competitive firm, a monopoly
firm faces a downward-sloping demand curve. A monopolist can reduce its product price
and sell more, and raise its product price and still retain some customers. When a demand
curve slopes downward, the associated marginal revenue (MR) curve lies below the
average revenue (AR) curve, and the slope of the MR curve is two times the slope of the AR
curve.

The revenue and cost conditions faced by a monopoly firm in the short- run are presented in
figure 2.1. The monopoly average and marginal revenue curves are represented by AR and
MR curves, respectively. The short-run average and marginal cost curves are represented
by SAC and SMC curves, respectively. The price and output decision rule for a profit-
maximising monopolist is same as that of a firm under perfect competition. The profit-
maximising monopoly firm chooses a price-output combination at which MR = SMC.

Given the monopolist’s cost and revenue curves in figure 2.1, its MR and SMC intersect each
other at point N. An ordinate drawn from point P to the Price-axis determines the profit-
maximising level of output for the firm at Q. At this output, firms’ MR = SMC. Given the
demand curve, AR = D, the output, Q can be sold in a given time at only one price, P1. It
follows that the determination of output simultaneously determines the price for the
monopoly firm. For any given price, the unit and total profits are also simultaneously
determined. This defines the equilibrium condition for the monopoly firm.
Figure 2.1: Short-Run Price and Output Determination Under Monopoly

The Algebraic Determination of Monopoly Price and Output


Suppose demand and cost functions for a monopoly firm are given as:
Demand function: 𝑄 = 100 − 0.2𝑃 (2.1)
Price function: 𝑃 = 500 − 5𝑄 (2.2)
Cost function: 𝐶 = 50 + 20𝑄 + 𝑄 2 (2.3)

The problem is to determine the profit-maximising level of output and price. This can be
solved in the following way.
Recall that profit is maximised at an output for which MR = MC. The first step is
therefore to find MR and MC using the demand and cost functions as given in equations
(2.1) and (2.2), and formulate the revenue function using equations (2.2):

Total Revenue (TR) = PQ, so that,


Since 𝑃 = 500 − 5𝑄
𝑇𝑅 = (500 − 5𝑄)𝑄
𝑇𝑅 = 500𝑄 − 5𝑄 2 (2.4)
MR can be obtained by differentiating the TR function
𝜕𝑇𝑅
𝑀𝑅 = = 500 − 10𝑄 (2.5)
𝜕𝑄

Likewise MC can be obtained by differentiating the TC function


𝜕𝑇𝐶
𝑀𝐶 = = 20 + 2𝑄 (2.6)
𝜕𝑄

MR = MC
500 − 10𝑄 = 20 + 2𝑄
480 = 12𝑄
𝑄 = 40
The output that maximise profit is 40 units.

The profit-maximising price can be obtained by substituting Q = 40 in the price function,


equation (2.2) to get:
𝑃 = 500 − 5𝑄
𝑃 = 500 − 5(40)
𝑃 = 300
Thus, the profit-maximising price, P = 300.

With these information, the total (maximum) profit can be calculated as follows: Profit:
𝜋 = 𝑇𝑅 − 𝑇𝐶
𝜋 = 500𝑄 − 5𝑄 2 − (50 + 20𝑄 + 𝑄 2 )
𝜋 = 500𝑄 − 5𝑄 2 − 50 − 20𝑄 − 𝑄 2 (2.7)
𝑄 = 40
= 500(40) − 5(40)2 − 50 − 20(40) − (40)2
= 20,000 − 8,000 − 50 − 800 − 1,600
= 9,550
Thus, the maximum profit (π) = 9,550.

3.2 Long-run Price and Output Determination Under Monopoly


The decision rules guiding optimal output and pricing in the long-run is same as in the short-
run. In the long-run however, a monopolist gets an opportunity to expand the size of its firm
with the aim of enhancing the long-run profits. Expansion of the plant size may, however, be
subject to such conditions as:
(a) the market size;
(b) expected economic profit; and,
(c) risk of inviting legal restrictions.
The equilibrium of the monopoly price and output determination in the long-run is shown in
figure 2.2. The AR and MR curves show the market demand and marginal revenue conditions
faced by the monopoly firm. The LAC and LMC show the long-run cost conditions. The
LMC and MR intersect at point P where output is OQ2. This is, therefore, the profit
maximising output. Given the AR curve, the price at which the total output OQ2 can be sold
is P2Q2. This, output-price combination maximises the monopolist’s long-run profit. The total
monopoly is shown by the area LMSP2.

The monopolist produces a larger output and charges a lower price and makes a larger profit.
But in the short-run, the monopoly equilibrium is at output OQ1 which is less than long-run
output OQ2. The short-run equilibrium price P1Q1 is greater than the long-run equilibrium
price P2Q2. The total short-run monopoly profit is shown by the area JP1TK which is much
smaller than the long-run profit area, LP2SM. This, however, is not necessary because it all
depends on the cost and revenue conditions in short-run and long-run.

Figure 2.2: Monopoly Equilibrium in the Long-Run

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise 1


Explain with graphical illustration short-run price and output determination of a monopoly

Self-Assessment Exercise 2
Discuss the long-run price and output determination of a monopolist.

Self-Assessment Exercises 3
Suppose demand curve for a monopoly firm is given as:
𝑃 = 40 − 4𝑄
And its total cost (TC) function is given as:
𝑇𝐶 = 40 + 5𝑄 + 𝑄 2
Find the following:
a. Profit maximising output
b. Total profit for the monopolist.

5.0 Conclusion
A monopoly market is one in which there is only on seller of a product having no close
substitute. The cross- elasticity of demand for a monopolist’s product is either zero or
negative. A monopolized industry refers to a single-firm industry.

pricing and output decision under monopoly are based on revenue and cost conditions. The
cost conditions (AC and MC curves) are same for both perfect competition and pure
monopoly. The difference is basically in the revenue conditions (AR and MR curves). This
is so because, unlike the competitive firm, a monopoly firm faces a downward-sloping
demand curve. A monopolist can reduce its product price and sell more, and raise its
product price and still retain some customers. When a demand curve slopes downward, the
associated marginal revenue (MR) curve lies below the average revenue (AR) curve, and the
slope of the MR curve is two times the slope of the AR curve.

In the long-run however, a monopolist gets an opportunity to expand the size of its firm with
the aim of enhancing the long-run profits. Expansion of the plant size may, however, be
subject to such conditions as:
(d) the market size;
(e) expected economic profit; and,
(f) risk of inviting legal restrictions.
6.0 Summary
You have just been informed by this unit that:
1. Monopoly has a downward slope demand curve which shows that the monopolist can
determine either the price or output but cannot determine both at the same time.
2. Monopoly pricing and output decision is based on revenue and cost conditions. A
monopolist maximizes output at the point where marginal revenue (MR) equals marginal cost
(MC).
3. The decision rules guiding optimal output and pricing in the long- run is same as in the
short-run. In the long-run however, a monopolist gets an opportunity to expand the size of its
firm with the aim of enhancing the long-run profits. Expansion is sometimes subject to
such conditions as:
a. the market size;
b. expected economic profit; and,
c. risk of inviting legal restrictions.

7.0 References/Further Readings


Baumol, W. J. (1985). Economic Theory and operations Analysis, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd, New Delhi
Bilas, R. A. (1971). Microeconomic Theory, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Boulding. K. E. (1966). Economics Analysis: Microeconomics, 4th Edition, New York Harper
and Row.
Douglas, E. J. (1983). Managerial Economics: Theory and Practice and problems, 2nd
Edition. Prentice-Hall Inc., New Jersey.
Ferguson, C. E. (1972). Microeconomic Theory, 3rd Edition, Illnois, Richard D. Irwin, Inc.
Haessuler, E. F. & Paul, R. S. (1976). Introductory Mathematical Analysis for Students of
Business and Economics, 2nd edition (Reston Virginia: Reston Publishing Company)
Hirshleifer, J. (1987). Price Theory and Application, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.
Nicholson, W. (1975). Intermediate Microeconomics and Its Application, Dryden Press,
Hindale.
Webb, S. C. (1976). Managerial Economics, Houghton Mifflin, Boston.
Self-Assessment Exercise 1 Answer
A monopoly firm faces a downward-sloping demand curve. A monopolist can reduce its
product price and sell more, and raise its product price and still retain some customers.
When a demand curve slopes downward, the associated marginal revenue (MR) curve lies
below the average revenue (AR) curve, and the slope of the MR curve is two times the slope
of the AR curve.

The revenue and cost conditions faced by a monopoly firm in the short- run are presented in
graph above. The monopoly average and marginal revenue curves are represented by AR and
MR curves, respectively. The short-run average and marginal cost curves are represented
by SAC and SMC curves, respectively. The price and output decision rule for a profit-
maximising monopolist is same as that of a firm under perfect competition. The profit-
maximising monopoly firm chooses a price-output combination at which MR = SMC.

Given the monopolist’s cost and revenue curves, its MR and SMC intersect each other at
point N. An ordinate drawn from point P to the price-axis determines the profit-maximising
level of output for the firm at Q. At this output, firms’ MR = SMC. Given the demand
curve, AR = D, the output, Q can be sold in a given time at only one price, P1. It follows that
the determination of output simultaneously determines the price for the monopoly firm. For
any given price, the unit and total profits are also simultaneously determined. This defines the
equilibrium condition for the monopoly firm. The profit shape is represented by the shaded
portion P1PP2M.
Self-Assessment Exercise 2 Answer
The monopoly price and output determination in the long-run is as a result of the expansion
of the monopoly from the short-run market situation.

The AR and MR curves show the market demand and marginal revenue conditions faced by
the monopoly firm. The LAC and LMC show the long-run cost conditions. The LMC and
MR intersect at point P where output is OQ2. This is, therefore, the profit maximising output.
Given the AR curve, the price at which the total output OQ2 can be sold is P2Q2. This, output-
price combination maximises the monopolist’s long-run profit. The total monopoly is shown
by the area LMSP2.

The monopolist produces a larger output and charges a lower price and makes a larger profit.
But in the short-run, the monopoly equilibrium is at output OQ1 which is less than long-run
output OQ2. The short-run equilibrium price P1Q1 is greater than the long-run equilibrium
price P2Q2. The total short-run monopoly profit is shown by the area JP1TK which is much
smaller than the long-run profit area, LP2SM. This, however, is not necessary because it all
depends on the cost and revenue conditions in short-run and long-run.

Self-Assessment Exercise 3 Answer


(i)
𝑃 = 40 − 4𝑄
𝑇𝐶 = 40 + 5𝑄 + 𝑄 2
𝑇𝑅 = 𝑃𝑄
= (40 − 4𝑄)𝑄
= 40𝑄 − 4𝑄 2
𝑀𝑅 = 40 − 8𝑄
𝑇𝐶 = 40 + 5𝑄 + 𝑄 2
𝑀𝐶 = 5 + 2𝑄
𝑀𝑅 = 𝑀𝐶
40 − 8𝑄 = 5 + 2𝑄
40 − 5 = 8𝑄 + 2𝑄
35 = 10𝑄
𝑄 = 3.5 𝑢𝑛𝑖𝑡𝑠
. Profit maximising output is 3.5 units
(ii)
Profit = TR – TC
= 40𝑄 − 4𝑄 2 − (40 + 5𝑄 + 𝑄 2 )
= 40(3.5) − 4(3.5)2 − (40 + 5(3.5) + (3.5)2 )
= 140 − 4(12.25) − (40 + 17.5 + 12.25)
𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑓𝑖𝑡 = 21.25
Total profit for the monopolist is 21.25
UNIT 3: MONOPOLISTIC COMPETITION
Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Learning Outcomes
3.0 Monopolistic Competition
3.1 Short-run Price and Output Determination Under Monopolistic Competition
3.2 Long-run Price and Output Determination Under Monopolistic Competition
4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise
5.0 Conclusion
6.0 Summary
7.0 References/Further Readings

1.0 Introduction
Monopolistic competition is a market structure which combines elements of monopoly and
competitive markets. Essentially a monopolistic competitive market is one with freedom of
entry and exit, but firms can differentiate their products. Therefore, they have an inelastic
demand curve and so they can set prices. However, because there is freedom of entry,
supernormal profits will encourage more firms to enter the market leading to normal profits
in the long term.
A monopolistic competitive industry has the following features:
• Many firms.
• Freedom of entry and exit.
• Firms produce differentiated products.
• Firms have price inelastic demand; they are price makers because the good is
highly differentiated
• Firms make normal profits in the long run but could make supernormal profits
in the short term
• Firms are allocative and productive inefficient.

2.0 Learning Outcomes


At the end of this unit, you will be able to:
i. Know what is monopolistic competition.
ii. Know how monopolistic competition determines it price and output in the short-run and
long-run.

3.0 Monopolistic Competition


Monopolistic competition is characteristically close to perfect competition pricing and output
decisions under but the kind of market is similar to that of the monopoly. The reason is that a
firm under monopolistic competition, like a monopolist faces a downward sloping demand
curve. This kind demand curve is the result of a strong preference of the section of the
consumers for the product, and two, the quasi-monopoly of the seller over the supply. The
strong preference or brand loyalty of the consumers gives the seller an opportunity to raise
the price and yet retain some customers. And, since each product is a substitute for the other,
the firms can attract the consumers of other products y lowering their prices.

3.1 Short-run Price and Output Determination Under Monopolistic Competition


The short-run price and output determination under monopolistic competition in figure 3.1
shows that MR intercept MC at point N. This point fulfils the necessary condition of profit-
maximisation at output OQ. Given the demand curve, this output can be sold at rice PQ. So
the price is determined at PQ. At this output and price, the firm earns a maximum monopoly
or economic profit PM per unit of output and a total monopoly profit shown by the rectangle
P1PMP2. The economic profit, PM per unit exists in the short-run because of no possibility of
new firms entering the industry. But the rate of profit would not be the same for all firms
under monopolistic competition because of difference in elasticity of demand for their
product.
Figure 3.1: Short-Run Price Determination Under Monopolistic Competition

3.2 Long-run Price and Output Determination Under Monopolistic Competition


In the long-run, the monopolistic competition revenue curves are given by AR1 and MR1 and
the long-run cost curves as LAC and LMC in figure 3.2. MR1 and LMC intersect at point M
determining the equilibrium output at OQ2 and price at P2Q2. At price P2Q2, the firms make
supernormal or economic profit at P2T per unit of output.

Figure 3.2: Long-Run Price Determination Under Monopolistic Competition

There two important changes in the long-run.


First, the supernormal profit attracts new firms to the industry. As a result, the existing firms
lose a part of their market share to new firms. Consequently, their demand curve shifts
downward to the left until AR is tangent to LAC. This kind of change in the demand curve is
shown by the shift in AR curve from AR1 to AR2 and the MR curve fromMR1 to MR2.
Second, the increasing number of firms intensifies the price competition between the firms.
Price competition increases because losing firms try to regain or retain their market share by
cutting down the price of their product. And, new firms in order to penetrate the market set
comparatively low prices for their product. The price competition increase the slope of the
firms’ demand curve or, in order words, it makes the demand curve more elastic. The AR 2
has a greater slope than AR1.

In the long-run therefore, the LMC intersects MR2 at point N where firm’s long-run
equilibrium output is determined at OQ1 and price at P1Q1. Note that price P1Q1 equals the
LAC which means that under monopolistic competition, firms make only normal profit in the
long-run once all the firms reach this stage, there is no attraction (supernormal profit) for the
new firms to enter the industry, nor is there any reason for the existing firms to quit the
industry. This shows the long-run equilibrium of the industry.

4.0 Self-Assessment Exercise 1


Is there a different between short-run price and output determination of monopoly and
monopolistic competition?

Self-Assessment Exercise 2
Discuss with relevant diagrams the long-run situation in monopolistic competitive market.

5.0 Conclusion
Monopolistic competition is characteristically close to perfect competition pricing and output
decisions under but the kind of market is similar to that of the monopoly. The reason is that a
firm under monopolistic competition, like a monopolist faces a downward sloping demand
curve. This kind demand curve is the result of a strong preference of the section of the
consumers for the product, and two, the quasi-monopoly of the seller over the supply.

The short-run price and output determination under monopolistic competition is determined
where that MR intercept MC which give the firm’s output and the price.

In the long-run, the monopolistic competition revenue curves are given by AR1 and MR1 and
the long-run cost curves as LAC and LMC. The MR1 and LMC intersect to give the firm’s
output and the price.

6.0 Summary
You have just been informed by this unit that:
1. Monopolistic competition is a market structure defined by free entry and exit.
2. The demand curve of a monopolistically competitive firm is downward sloping.
3. Pricing and output decision under monopolistically competitive market is determined
where marginal revenue (MR) equals marginal cost (MC).
4. The monopolistically competitive firm makes abnormal profit in the short-run and makes
normal profit or loss in the long-run.

7.0 References/Further Readings


Baumol, W. J. (1985). Economic Theory and operations Analysis, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt.
Ltd, New Delhi
Bilas, R. A. (1971). Microeconomic Theory, McGraw-Hill, New York.
Boulding. K. E. (1966). Economics Analysis: Microeconomics, 4th Edition, New York Harper
and Row.
Douglas, E. J. (1983). Managerial Economics: Theory and Practice and problems, 2nd
Edition. Prentice-Hall Inc., New Jersey.
Ferguson, C. E. (1972). Microeconomic Theory, 3rd Edition, Illnois, Richard D. Irwin, Inc.
Haessuler, E. F. & Paul, R. S. (1976). Introductory Mathematical Analysis for Students of
Business and Economics, 2nd edition (Reston Virginia: Reston Publishing Company)
Hirshleifer, J. (1987). Price Theory and Application, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.
Nicholson, W. (1975). Intermediate Microeconomics and Its Application, Dryden Press,
Hindale.
Webb, S. C. (1976). Managerial Economics, Houghton Mifflin, Boston.
Self-Assessment Exercise 1 Answer
There is no difference between the short-run price and output determination of monopoly and
monopolistic competition. In the short-run, price and output determination under
monopolistic competition shows that MR intercept MC at point N. This point fulfils the
necessary condition of profit-maximisation at output OQ. Given the demand curve, this
output can be sold at rice PQ. So the price is determined at PQ. At this output and price, the
firm earns a maximum monopoly or economic profit PM per unit of output and a total
monopoly profit shown by the rectangle P1PMP2. The economic profit, PM per unit exists in
the short-run because of no possibility of new firms entering the industry. But the rate of
profit would not be the same for all firms under monopolistic competition because of
difference in elasticity of demand for their product.

Self-Assessment Exercise 2 Answer


In the long-run, the monopolistic competition revenue curves are given by AR1 and MR1 and
the long-run cost curves as LAC and LMC. MR1 and LMC intersect at point M determining
the equilibrium output at OQ2 and price at P2Q2. At price P2Q2, the firms make supernormal
or economic profit at P2T per unit of output.
The short-run supernormal profit attracts new firms to the industry. As a result, the existing
firms lose a part of their market share to new firms. Consequently, their demand curve shifts
downward to the left until AR is tangent to LAC. This kind of change in the demand curve is
shown by the shift in AR curve from AR1 to AR2 and the MR curve fromMR1 to MR2. The
increasing number of firms intensifies the price competition between the firms. Price
competition increases because losing firms try to regain or retain their market share by
cutting down the price of their product. And, new firms in order to penetrate the market set
comparatively low prices for their product. The price competition increase the slope of the
firms’ demand curve or, in order words, it makes the demand curve more elastic. The AR 2
has a greater slope than AR1.

In the long-run therefore, the LMC intersects MR2 at point N where firm’s long-run
equilibrium output is determined at OQ1 and price at P1Q1. Note that price P1Q1 equals the
LAC which means that under monopolistic competition, firms make only normal profit in the
long-run once all the firms reach this stage, there is no attraction (supernormal profit) for the
new firms to enter the industry, nor is there any reason for the existing firms to quit the
industry. This shows the long-run equilibrium of the industry.

You might also like